Note

• If a compatible application is not installed, the text in the image is extracted and appears in your
text editor.
Text to be displayed is based on Document Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog
box. Select the language you want to extract in Document Language and scan.
• You can add the application from the pull-down menu.

5. Click OK.

The IJ Scan Utility main screen appears.

503
 Note
• Refer to the following pages for details on the setting items in the Settings dialog box.

Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box

Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box

6. Click Document.

Scanning starts.

When scanning is completed, the scanned images are saved according to the settings, and the extracted
text appears in the specified application.

Note
• Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• Text displayed in your text editor is for guidance only. Text in the image of the following types of
documents may not be detected correctly.

• Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
• Slanted documents
• Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with narrow line spacing
• Documents with colors in the background of text
• Documents containing multiple languages

504
IJ Scan Utility Screens
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen
Settings Dialog Box
Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box

Save Settings Dialog Box

Image Stitch Window

505
IJ Scan Utility Main Screen
Follow the steps below to start IJ Scan Utility.

Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

Select IJ Scan Utility on the Start screen to start IJ Scan Utility.

If IJ Scan Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "IJ Scan
Utility".

Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, select All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Scan Utility > IJ Scan Utility to start IJ
Scan Utility.

You can complete from scanning to saving at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.

Product Name
Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.

If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.

In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.

Note
• Refer to "Network Scan Settings" for how to set up a network environment.

Auto
Detects the item type automatically and saves them to a computer. The data format for saving will also
be set automatically.

Save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog
box.

Document
Scans items as documents and saves them to a computer.

Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box.

Photo
Scans items as photos and saves them to a computer.

Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Photo Scan)
dialog box.

Custom
Scans items with your favorite settings and saves the images to a computer. The item type can be
automatically detected.

Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box.

506
Stitch
Displays the Image Stitch window in which you can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than
the platen and combine the scanned images back into one image.

Scan/save settings and the response after scanning can be specified in the Settings (Scan and Stitch)
dialog box.

ScanGear
Starts ScanGear (scanner driver) in which you can make image corrections and color adjustments
when scanning.
Scan/save settings and applications can be specified in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Settings...
Displays the Settings dialog box in which you can specify the scan/save settings and the response after
scanning.

507
Settings Dialog Box

There are three tabs in the Settings dialog box: (Scanning from a Computer), (Scanning from the

Operation Panel), and (General Settings). When you click a tab, the view in the red frame switches and
you can make advanced settings to functions on each tab.

(Scanning from a Computer) Tab

You can specify how to respond when scanning from IJ Scan Utility or My Image Garden.

Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box

Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box

(Scanning from the Operation Panel) Tab

You can specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel.

Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box

Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box

508
 Important

• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the (Scanning from the
Operation Panel) tab does not appear.

(General Settings) Tab

You can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail attachment, language to detect text in
images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.

Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box

509
Settings (Auto Scan) Dialog Box

Click Auto Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog
box.

In the Settings (Auto Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan by automatically
detecting the item type.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.

Supported Items

Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, and BD/DVD/CD.

Important
• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type and size in the Settings (Document Scan)
dialog box, Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click
Photo, Document, or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main screen. You cannot scan correctly with Auto.

• A4 size photos
• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
• Items printed on thin white paper
• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos

• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.

510
• Place items to be scanned on the platen correctly. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.

Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items.

• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place documents of
the same size.

Note
• To reduce moire in scans, set Select Source to Magazine in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog
box or Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, then click Document or Custom in the IJ Scan Utility main
screen.

(1) Scan Options Area

Apply recommended image correction
Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.

Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect the
checkbox and scan.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder
• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format
Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type
when saving.

511
 • Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG
• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF

Important
• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.

You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.

512
 Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

513
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box

Click Document Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Document
Scan) dialog box.

In the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as
documents.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.

(1) Scan Options Area

Select Source
Select the type of item to be scanned.

• Scanning documents: Document or Document (ADF/Platen)

• Scanning magazines: Magazine
• Scanning documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder): Document (ADF Simplex),
Document (ADF Manual Duplex), or Document (ADF/Platen)

514
 Note
• When Document (ADF/Platen) is selected and documents are placed both on the platen and
ADF, those placed on the ADF will be scanned.

Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.

Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.

When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.

Note
• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.

Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.

Resolution

Note
• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.

Document Scan Orientation Settings...

This appears when you select ADF for Select Source.

Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation and binding side of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.

515
 Important
• Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document.

Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following.

Note
• The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode.

Apply Auto Document Fix

Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.

Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.

Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.

Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots
are scanned.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.

Reduce gutter shadow/Reduce gutter shadow (platen)

Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.

Note
• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when
scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.
Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
details.
• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.

Correct slanted text document

Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10
degrees) of the document.

516
 Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be
detected correctly.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary
by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.

Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image

Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text in
the scanned document.

Important
• Only text documents written in the language selected from Document Language in the
Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since
the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds

In that case, select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save
Settings dialog box.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder

517
 • Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).

Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple
Pages).

Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

518
 Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

Check scan results

Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.

You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.

Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

519
Settings (Photo Scan) Dialog Box

Click Photo Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Photo Scan)
dialog box.

In the Settings (Photo Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan items as photos.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.

(1) Scan Options Area

Select Source
Photo is selected.

Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.

Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.

When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.

520
 Note
• Click Defaults to restore the specified settings to the default settings.

Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Resolution

Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following.

Important
• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.

521
 You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.

Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.

Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

Check scan results

Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.
You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.

You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

522
 Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

523
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box

Click Custom Scan on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box.

In the Settings (Custom Scan) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings to scan according to your
preference.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.

(1) Scan Options Area

Select Source
Select the type of item to be scanned. Select Auto to detect the item type automatically and to set
Color Mode, Paper Size, and Resolution automatically as well.

524
 Important
• Item types supported by Auto are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers,
documents, and BD/DVD/CD.
• To scan the following types of items, specify the item type or size. You cannot scan correctly with
Auto.

• A4 size photos
• Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
• Items printed on thin white paper
• Long narrow items such as panoramic photos

• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.

• Place items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be
scanned correctly.
Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items.

• When scanning two or more documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), place
documents of the same size even if Auto is set.

Note
• To convert text in the image into text data after scanning, specify Select Source instead of
selecting Auto.
• To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine or select the Reduce moire checkbox in
Image Processing Settings.

Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.

Note
• Only Color is available when Select Source is Auto.

Paper Size
Select the size of the item to be scanned.

When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the paper size appears. Select a Unit,
then enter the Width and Height, and then click OK.

Note
• Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto.
• Click Defaults in the screen in which you can specify the paper size to restore the specified
settings to the default settings.

Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.

525
 The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.

Resolution

Note
• Only Auto is available when Select Source is Auto.
• Only 300 dpi or 400 dpi can be set when Start OCR is selected in Application Settings.

Document Scan Orientation Settings...

This appears when you select ADF or Auto for Select Source.
Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation and binding side of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.

Important
• Binding Side cannot be specified when scanning only the front side of each document.

Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source.

• When Select Source is Auto:

Apply recommended image correction

Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.

Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case,
deselect the checkbox and scan.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

• When Select Source is Photo:

Important
• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

526
• When Select Source is Magazine or Document:

Note
• The displayed items vary by Select Source and Color Mode.

Apply Auto Document Fix

Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.

Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case,
deselect the checkbox and scan.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.

Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.

Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.

Reduce gutter shadow

Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.

Note
• Use ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when
scanning non-standard size items or specified areas.
Refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
details.

• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.

Correct slanted text document

Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10
degrees) of the document.

Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot
be detected correctly.

527
 • Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles
vary by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.

Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image

Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text
in the scanned document.

Important
• Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document
Language in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents
since the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds

In that case, select the Check scan results checkbox and rotate the image in the Save
Settings dialog box.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

528
 Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.

You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto.

Important
• When Auto is selected, the save format may differ depending on how you place the item.
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
• When Start OCR is selected in Application Settings, you cannot select PDF, PDF (Multiple
Pages), or Auto.

Note
• Auto appears only when Auto is selected for Select Source.
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif or Auto is selected in Data Format.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Important
• This appears only when PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Important
• This appears only when PDF, PDF (Multiple Pages), or Auto is selected in Data Format.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

529
 Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

Check scan results

Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.

Important
• This does not appear when Select Source is Auto.
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.

You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.

Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application
Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

530
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box

Click Scan and Stitch on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (Scan and
Stitch) dialog box.

In the Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings for scanning items
larger than the platen.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from the Scan screen of My Image Garden, the setting items
for Application Settings do not appear.

(1) Scan Options Area

Select Source
Select the type of item to be scanned.

• Scanning photos: Photo

• Scanning documents: Document
• Scanning magazines: Magazine

Note
• To reduce moire, set Select Source to Magazine or select the Reduce moire checkbox in
Image Processing Settings.

531
Color Mode
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.

Resolution
Select the resolution of the item to be scanned.

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.

Resolution

Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following. Available setting items vary by Select Source.

Important
• When Color Mode is Black and White, Image Processing Settings is not available.

• When Select Source is Photo:

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

• When Select Source is Magazine or Document:

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.

Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.

Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder
• Windows 8: My Documents folder

532
 • Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.
You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).

Important
• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.

Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

533
 If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

Check scan results

Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

534
Settings (ScanGear) Dialog Box

Click ScanGear on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab to display the Settings (ScanGear) dialog
box.

In the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box, you can specify how to save images when scanning items by
starting ScanGear (scanner driver) and how to respond after saving them.

(1) Save Settings Area

(2) Application Settings Area

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, the setting items for Application
Settings do not appear.

(1) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

535
 • Windows 8.1: Documents folder
• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.

You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).

Note
• When PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected, images up to 9600 pixels x 9600 pixels can be
scanned.
• When the Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings, or when Start
OCR is selected in Application Settings, you can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, or PNG.
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

536
Save to a subfolder with current date
Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

Enable large image scans

Select this checkbox to scan images up to 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels and 1.8 GB.

Important
• When this checkbox is selected, you cannot select Send to an application, Send to a folder,
Attach to e-mail, or Start OCR.
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

Note
• When this checkbox is not selected, images up to 10208 pixels x 14032 pixels can be scanned.

Check scan results

Displays the Save Settings dialog box after scanning.

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, this option does not appear.

(2) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Attach to e-mail
Select this when you want to send e-mails with the scanned images attached.

You can specify the e-mail client you want to start from the pull-down menu.

Start OCR
Select this when you want to convert text in the scanned image into text data.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

537
 Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

538
Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box

Click Save to PC (Auto) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings (Save
to PC (Auto)) dialog box.

In the Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a
computer after scanning them from the operation panel by automatically detecting the item type.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

(1) Scan Options Area

Paper Size
Auto is selected.

Resolution
Auto is selected.

Document Scan Orientation Settings...

Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.

539
Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following.

Apply recommended image correction

Applies suitable corrections automatically based on the item type.

Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Data Format
Auto is selected. The following data formats are automatically applied according to the item type
when saving.

• Photos, postcards, BD/DVD/CD, and business cards: JPEG

• Magazines, newspapers, and documents: PDF

Important
• The save format may differ depending on how you place the item.

540
 Refer to "Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)" for how to place items.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

541
Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

542
Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box

Click Save to PC (Photo) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings
(Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box.

In the Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images to a
computer as photos after scanning them from the operation panel.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

(1) Scan Options Area

Paper Size
Set from the operation panel.

Resolution
Set from the operation panel.

Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following.

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

543
 Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Data Format
Set from the operation panel.
JPEG Image Quality
You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.

You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

544
Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

545
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box

Click Save to PC (Document) on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab to display the Settings
(Save to PC (Document)) dialog box.

In the Settings (Save to PC (Document)) dialog box, you can specify how to respond when saving images
to a computer as documents after scanning them from the operation panel.

(1) Scan Options Area

(2) Save Settings Area
(3) Application Settings Area

(1) Scan Options Area

Paper Size
Set from the operation panel.

Resolution
Set from the operation panel.

Document Scan Orientation Settings...

Click to display the Document Scan Orientation Settings dialog box in which you can set the
orientation of the documents to be scanned from the ADF.

546
Image Processing Settings

Click (Plus) to set the following.

Apply Auto Document Fix

Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or magazine for better readability.

Important
• The color tone may differ from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.

Sharpen outline
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image.

Reduce show-through
Sharpens text in an item or reduces show-through in newspapers, etc.

Reduce moire
Reduces moire patterns.

Printed materials are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots
are scanned.

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Reduce moire.

Reduce gutter shadow (platen)

Reduces gutter shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

Important
• This function is available only when scanning from the platen.

Note
• When you enable this function, scanning may take longer than usual with network
connection.

Correct slanted text document

Detects the scanned text and corrects the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1 to +10
degrees) of the document.

547
 Important
• The following types of documents may not be corrected properly since the text cannot be
detected correctly.
• Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary
by line
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
• Documents with extremely large or small fonts
• Documents with small amount of text
• Documents containing figures/images
• Hand-written text
• Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)

Note
• Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted text document.

Detect the orientation of text document and rotate image

Automatically rotates the image to the correct orientation by detecting the orientation of text in
the scanned document.

Important
• Only text documents written in languages that can be selected from Document Language
in the Settings (General Settings) dialog box are supported.
• The orientation may not be detected for the following types of settings or documents since
the text cannot be detected correctly.
• Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
• Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
• Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
• Documents with patterned backgrounds

(2) Save Settings Area

File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder

• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder

548
 • Windows XP: My Documents folder

Data Format
Set from the operation panel.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

(3) Application Settings Area

Open with an application
Select this when you want to enhance or correct the scanned images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to an application
Select this when you want to use the scanned images as they are in an application that allows you to
browse or organize images.

You can specify the application from the pull-down menu.

Send to a folder
Select this when you also want to save the scanned images to a folder other than the one specified in
Save in.
You can specify the folder from the pull-down menu.

Do not start any application

Saves to the folder specified in Save in.

Note
• To add an application or folder to the pull-down menu, select Add... from the pull-down menu, then
click Add in the displayed Select Application or Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify
the application or folder.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

549
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box

Click the (General Settings) tab to display the Settings (General Settings) dialog box.

In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, you can set the product to use, file size restriction on e-mail
attachment, language to detect text in images, and folder in which to save images temporarily.

Important
• When the Settings dialog box is displayed from My Image Garden, some options may not appear.

Product Name
Displays the name of the product that IJ Scan Utility is currently set to use.

If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.

In addition, for network connection, select one with "Network" after the product name.

Note
• With network connection, Select appears on the right side of the product name. Click Select to
display IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from which you can change the scanner to use. Refer to
"Network Scan Settings" for the setting procedure.

E-mail Attachment Size

You can restrict the size of scanned images to be attached to an e-mail.
You can select Small (Suitable for 640 x 480 Windows), Medium (Suitable for 800 x 600 Windows),
Large (Suitable for 1024 x 768 Windows), or No Change.

Document Language
You can select the language for detecting text in images and for use with search when a PDF file that
supports keyword search is created.

Folder to Save Temporary Files

Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. Click Browse... to specify the destination
folder.

550
Instructions
Opens this guide.

Defaults
You can restore the settings in the displayed screen to the default settings.

551
Save Settings Dialog Box
Select the Check scan results checkbox in Save Settings of the Settings dialog box to display the Save
Settings dialog box after scanning.

You can specify the data format and destination while viewing the thumbnails of scan results.

Important
• After scanning from My Image Garden or the operation panel, the Save Settings dialog box does not
appear.

(1) Preview Operation Buttons

(2) Scan Results Area
(3) Save Settings Area

(1) Preview Operation Buttons

/ (Rotate Left 90°)/(Rotate Right 90°)

Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.

Select the image you want to rotate, then click (Rotate Left 90°) or (Rotate Right 90°).

Important
• The preview operation buttons do not appear when the Enable large image scans checkbox is
selected in the Settings (ScanGear) dialog box.

(2) Scan Results Area

Displays the thumbnails of the scanned images. You can change the save order of images via drag-and-
drop. The file names for saving appear below the thumbnails.

552
(3) Save Settings Area
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved. When you save a file, the date and four digits are
appended to the set file name in the "_20XX0101_0001" format.

Note
• When you select the Save to a subfolder with current date checkbox, the date and four digits
are appended to the set file name.

Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To add a folder, select Add... from the pull-
down menu, then click Add in the displayed Select Destination Folder dialog box and specify the
destination folder.

The default save folders are as follows.

• Windows 8.1: Documents folder
• Windows 8: My Documents folder
• Windows 7: My Documents folder
• Windows Vista: Documents folder
• Windows XP: My Documents folder

Data Format
Select the data format in which to save the scanned images.

You can select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, PNG, PDF, or PDF (Multiple Pages).

Important
• You cannot select PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) in the following cases.

• When scanned by clicking Photo in the IJ Scan Utility main screen

• The Enable large image scans checkbox is selected in Save Settings of the Settings
(ScanGear) dialog box
• Start OCR is selected in Application Settings of the Settings (Document Scan), Settings
(Custom Scan), or Settings (ScanGear) dialog box

• You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.

Note
• With network connection, scanning may take longer than usual when you set TIFF or PNG in
Data Format.

JPEG Image Quality

You can specify the image quality of JPEG files.

Important
• This appears only when JPEG/Exif is selected in Data Format.

PDF Compression
Select the compression type for saving PDF files.

Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.

553
 Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.
• When Black and White is selected in Color Mode, this option does not appear.

Create a PDF file that supports keyword search

Select this checkbox to convert text in images into text data and create PDF files that support
keyword search.

Important
• This appears only when PDF or PDF (Multiple Pages) is selected in Data Format.

Note

• PDF files that are searchable in the language selected in Document Language on the
(General Settings) tab of the Settings dialog box are created.

Save to a subfolder with current date

Select this checkbox to create a current date folder in the folder specified in Save in and save
scanned images in it. The folder will be created with a name such as "20XX_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date).

If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.

554
Image Stitch Window
Click Stitch in the IJ Scan Utility main screen to display the Image Stitch window.

You can scan the left and right halves of an item larger than the platen and combine them back into one
image. You can scan items up to approximately twice as large as the platen.

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail View Area
(4) Preview Area

Note
• The displayed items vary depending on the select source and view.

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

Select Output Size
B4 (B5 x 2)
Scans the left and right halves of a B4 size item separately.

A3 (A4 x 2)
Scans the left and right halves of an A3 size item separately.

11 x 17 (Letter x 2)
Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as Letter size separately.

Full Platen x 2
Scans the left and right halves of an item twice as large as the platen separately.

Scan Direction
Scan from Left
Displays the first scanned image on the left side.

Scan from Right

Displays the first scanned image on the right side.

555
Scan Image 1
Start Scanning Image 1
Scans the first item.

Scan Image 2
Start Scanning Image 2
Scans the second item.

Adjust cropping frames

You can adjust the scan area in preview.

If no area is specified, the image of the size selected in Select Output Size will be saved. If an area
is specified, only the image in the cropping frame will be scanned and saved.

Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window

556
Save
Save
Saves the two scanned images as one image.

Cancel
Cancels Stitch scan.

(2) Toolbar
You can delete the scanned images or adjust the previewed images.

(Delete)
Deletes the image selected in the Thumbnail View area.

(Enlarge/Reduce)
Allows you to enlarge or reduce the preview image.

Left-clicking the Preview area enlarges the displayed image.

Right-clicking the Preview area reduces the displayed image.

(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

(Rotate 180°)
Rotates the preview image 180 degrees.

(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.

(Open Guide)
Opens this page.

(3) Thumbnail View Area

Displays the thumbnails of the scanned images. Appears blank if none has been scanned.

(4) Preview Area

Displays the scanned images. You can adjust the layout by dragging the scanned image or check the
results of the settings made in "(1) Settings and Operation Buttons."

557
 When no image has been scanned:

After scanning the first item by clicking Start Scanning Image 1:

The image is scanned in the direction specified in Scan Direction, and 2 appears next to it.

After scanning the second item by clicking Start Scanning Image 2:

The two scanned images appear.

Related Topic
Scanning Items Larger than the Platen (Image Stitch)

558
Scanning with Application Software that You are Using (ScanGear)
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in
Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.

559
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the output
size and make image corrections when scanning.

ScanGear can be started from IJ Scan Utility or applications that are compatible with a standard interface
called TWAIN. (ScanGear is a TWAIN-compatible driver.)

What You Can Do with This Software

This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when
scanning documents. It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone, as it allows you to make
various corrections and adjust brightness, contrast, etc.

Screens
There are two modes: Basic Mode and Advanced Mode.

Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen.

Note
• ScanGear starts in the last used mode.
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.

Basic Mode

Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps ( , , and

).

Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone,
etc. when scanning.

560
561
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in
Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

562
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning. ScanGear
can be started from IJ Scan Utility or other applications.

Note
• Set up the network environment if you have more than one scanner or have a network compatible
model and changed the connection from USB connection to network connection.

Starting IJ Scan Utility

Follow these steps to start ScanGear from IJ Scan Utility.

1. Start IJ Scan Utility.

Refer to "Starting IJ Scan Utility" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to start IJ
Scan Utility.

2. Click ScanGear in the IJ Scan Utility main screen.

The ScanGear screen appears.

Starting from an Application

Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear from an application.

The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual.

1. Start the application.

2. On the menu of the application, select the machine.

Note
• When you want to use a network compatible model by connecting to a network, select one with
"Network" displayed after the product name.

3. Select the command to scan a document.

The ScanGear screen appears.

563
Scanning in Basic Mode
Use the Basic Mode tab to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.

Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" to scan multiple
documents at one time from the Platen.

When scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), documents are scanned without preview.

Important

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click (Thumbnail)
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.

• Photos that have a whitish background

• Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
• Thin documents
• Thick documents

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly.

• Documents smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square

• Photos that have been cut to various shapes

Note
• When using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents
automatically from the ADF.

1. Place the document on the Platen or ADF, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen or ADF.

564
 Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the
application's manual.

Note
• To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine (Color).

3. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.

Important
• Preview is not displayed when an ADF type is selected for Select Source.

Note
• Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.

4. Set Destination.

Note
• Skip ahead to Step 7 when an ADF type is selected for Select Source.

5. Set Output Size according to purpose.

Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.

6. Adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) as required.

Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image.

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

7. Set Image corrections as required.

565
 8. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.

Note

• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab

566
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc.
when scanning.

Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)" to scan multiple
documents at one time.

Refer to "Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode" to scan
multiple documents placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).

Important

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly. In that case, click (Thumbnail)
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.

• Photos that have a whitish background

• Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
• Thin documents
• Thick documents

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly.

• Documents smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square

• Photos that have been cut to various shapes

1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

2. Click the Advanced Mode tab.

The tab switches to Advanced Mode.

Note
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.

567
 3. Set Input Settings according to the document or purpose.

4. Click Preview.
Preview images appear in the Preview area.

5. Set Output Settings.

6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image, and adjust colors as required.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons

7. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.

Note

• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab

568
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document
Feeder) in Advanced Mode
Use the Advanced Mode tab to specify the image brightness, color tone, etc. and scan multiple documents
placed on the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) at one time. When using a model supporting ADF duplex
scanning, you can scan both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF.

When scanning from the ADF, documents are scanned without preview.

1. Place the documents on the ADF of the machine, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

2. Click the Advanced Mode tab and select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF
Duplex) for Select Source.

Note
• Settings are not retained when you switch modes.
• You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.

3. Set Input Settings according to the document or purpose.

4. Set Output Settings.

5. Make image corrections and color adjustments as required.

Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons

6. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.

569
 Note

• Click (Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab

570
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time on the Basic Mode tab and
Advanced Mode tab.

This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab.

Important
• To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view.
• The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping
frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.

• Photos that have a whitish background

• Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
• Thin documents
• Thick documents

Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View

• The following types of documents may not be scanned correctly.

• Documents smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square

• Photos that have been cut to various shapes

Note
• You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced
Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image brightness,
and color tone.
• Refer to the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab.

Basic Mode Tab

Advanced Mode Tab

1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)

2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.

571
3. Click Preview.
Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Cropping frames are specified
automatically according to the document size.

4. Set Destination.

5. Set Output Size according to purpose.

6. Adjust the cropping frames and set Image corrections as required.

Note
• You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
• In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame per image. To create multiple cropping
frames in an image, scan in whole image view.

Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View

572
7. Select the images you want to scan.
Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan.

8. Click Scan.

Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View

Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan
multiple documents as a single image.

Note
• Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view.

1. After previewing images, click (Thumbnail) on the Toolbar.

Switch to whole image view.

Note

• When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to (Whole Image).

2. Set Destination.

3. Set Output Size according to purpose.

Invert aspect ratio will be enabled when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible. Click this button
to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.

4. Adjust the cropping frames.

573
 Adjust the size and position of the cropping frames on the preview image. You can also create two or
more cropping frames.

If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned.

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

5. Set Image corrections as required.

6. Click Scan.
Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.

Note
• A response of ScanGear after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.

574
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading
Correction, etc.)
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting Tone Curve
Setting Threshold

575
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches,
Fading Correction, etc.)
The Image Settings functions on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to
enhance the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches, and correct faded colors when scanning images.

Setting Items

Click (Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu.

Important
• Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone
may be adversely affected.
• Refer to "Image Settings" for details and precautions on each function.

Note
• Refer to "Scanning in Advanced Mode" to start the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear and scan.

Adjusting the image brightness and color tone

Set Image Adjustment to Auto, Photo, Magazine, or Document according to the document type.

None Auto

576
Reducing show-through in text documents or lightening the base color in
recycled paper, newspapers, etc. when scanning documents
Set Reduce Show-through to ON.

OFF ON

Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images

Set Unsharp Mask to ON.

OFF ON

Reducing gradations and stripe patterns

Set Descreen to ON.

OFF ON

577
 Note
• Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon
where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine
dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.

Reducing dust and scratches

Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of dust and
scratches.

None Medium

Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast

Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast.

None Medium

Reducing graininess
Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of graininess.

None Medium

Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets
Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium, or High according to the degree of shadows.

None Medium

578
579
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the color pattern function in
ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Basic Mode tab.

Color Adjustment
Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a
specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color.

Cyan & red, magenta & green, and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a
shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color
and increasing the complementary color.

It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so
that the portion turns white.

Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them.

580
Below is an example of correcting a bluish image.

Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.

Before After

Note
• Color adjustments are applied only to the cropping frames (scan areas) or the frame selected in
thumbnail view.
• You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
• You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern
screen.
• You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a warm
tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint.

581
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance

You can brighten colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast by using (Saturation/Color
Balance) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.

Saturation
Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.

Move (Slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the
right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Saturation decreased Original image Saturation increased

Note
• The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much.

Color Balance
Adjust images that have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire
picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

582
Move (Slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.

Cyan & Red

Magenta & Green

Yellow & Blue

These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can
reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary
color.

It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended
that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the
portion turns white.

You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted.

Cyan is increased Red is increased

583
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

You can adjust images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast by using
(Brightness/Contrast) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note
• Click (Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click (Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.

Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."

Master
Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.

Red
Adjust the Red channel.

Green
Adjust the Green channel.

Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.

Note
• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.

584
Brightness
Adjust the image brightness.

Move (Slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten the image. You can also
enter a value (-127 to 127).

Darkened Original image Brightened

Note
• Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken
the image too much.

Contrast
"Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing
contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the
difference, thus softening the image.

Move (Slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Decreased contrast Original image Increased contrast

Note
• Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However,
shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much.

585
Adjusting Histogram

You can adjust the image color tone by using a graph (histogram) showing brightness distribution, via
(Histogram) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.

Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."

Master
Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.

Red
Adjust the Red channel.

Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.

Note
• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.

Reading Histograms
You can see the histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the histogram peak, the
more data is distributed to that level.

586
 (1) Bright area (2) Dark area (3) Whole image

More data is distributed to the More data is distributed to the Data is widely distributed between the
highlight side. shadow side. highlight and shadow.

Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider)

Select a Channel, then move (Black-point Slider) or (White-point Slider) to specify the level to be
set as the shadow or highlight.

• All parts to the left of (Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).
• The parts at (Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and white-
point.
• All parts to the right of (White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255).

When Image Adjustment is set to anything but None, the adjustments shown below are performed
automatically.

Moving the Black-point and White-point Sliders

Move the Black-point Slider or White-point Slider to adjust brightness.

Images with more data distributed to the highlight side

Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side.

Images with more data distributed to the shadow side

Move the White-point Slider toward the shadow side.

Images with widely distributed data

Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side.

587
 Moving the Mid-point Slider
Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range.

Images with more data distributed to the highlight side

Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side.

Images with more data distributed to the shadow side

Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.

Adjusting Histograms (Using the Droppers)

When you select a Channel and click the Black-point, Mid-point, or White-point Dropper, the mouse
pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper. Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to
change the setting.

• The point clicked with (Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value
(0 to 245).

• The point clicked with (Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also
enter a value (5 to 250).

588
 • The point clicked with (White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a
value (10 to 255).

• Click (Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview
image.
The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted
accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole image
and reproduce natural colors.

589
Adjusting Tone Curve
You can adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance

of tone input and output, via (Tone Curve Settings) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode
tab.

Note
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.

Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green, and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."

Master
Adjust the Red, Green, and Blue combined.

Red
Adjust the Red channel.

Green
Adjust the Green channel.

Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.

Note
• Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.

Reading Tone Curves

With ScanGear, scanning images via a scanner is the input, and displaying to a monitor is the output.
"Tone Curve" shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel.

590
Adjusting Tone Curve
In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High
contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image, and Edit custom curve.

No correction (No adjustment)

Overexposure (Convex curve)

The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a bright-
toned image when viewed on a monitor.

Underexposure (Concave curve)

The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a dark-
toned image when viewed on a monitor.

High contrast (S curve)

The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image.

Reverse the negative/positive image (Downward-sloping line)

The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image.

591
Edit custom curve

You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding areas.

592
Setting Threshold
You can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers by adjusting the threshold level

via (Threshold) in ScanGear (scanner driver)'s Advanced Mode tab.

Note
• This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White.
• Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.

Adjusting Threshold
The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in
creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is
the borderline value that determines a color as black or white.

Move (Slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the
slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to
255).

593
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Input Settings
Output Settings
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons

Preferences Dialog Box

Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab

594
Basic Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.

This section describes the settings and functions available on the Basic Mode tab.

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area

Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

Select Source
Photo (Color)
Scan color photos.

Magazine (Color)
Scan color magazines.

Document (Color)
Scan documents in color.

Document (Grayscale)
Scan documents in black and white.

Document (Color) ADF Simplex

Scan documents from the ADF in color.

Document (Grayscale) ADF Simplex

Scan documents from the ADF in black and white.

Document (Color) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in color.

Document (Grayscale) ADF Duplex (only for models supporting ADF duplex scanning)
Scan both sides of documents from the ADF in black and white.

595
 Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the
application's manual.

Note
• When you select a document type, the unsharp mask function will be active.
• When you select an option other than the ADF types, the image adjustment function which
adjusts images based on the document type will also be active.
• If you select Magazine (Color), the descreen function will be active.

Display Preview Image

Preview
Performs a trial scan.

Note
• When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a
while until the preview image appears.

Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.

Print
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.

Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.

OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.

"OCR software" is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be
edited in word processors and other programs.

Output Size
Select an output size.

Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.

596
Flexible
Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames (scan areas).

In thumbnail view:

Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.

In whole image view:

When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.

Paper Size (L, A4, etc.)

Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of
the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining
the aspect ratio.

Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)

Select an output size in pixels. A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed
and the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. You can drag the cropping frame to
enlarge/reduce it while maintaining the aspect ratio.

Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output
sizes. You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display.

In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected,
along with the predefined items.

Adding:

Enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or
mm when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination is Image
display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save the items
listed in Output Size List.

Deleting:

Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, then click Delete. Click Save to
save the items listed in Output Size List.

Important
• You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.

597
 Note
• Save up to 10 items.
• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the setting range.

Note
• For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer
to Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" (Preferences dialog box).

Invert aspect ratio

Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.

Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.

Adjust cropping frames

You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area.

If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

Image corrections
Allows you to apply corrections to images.

Important
• Apply Auto Document Fix and Correct fading are available when Recommended is selected
on the Color Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Note
• Available functions vary by the document type selected in Select Source.

Apply Auto Document Fix

Sharpens text in a document or magazine for better readability.

Important
• Scanning may take longer than usual when this checkbox is selected.
• The color tone may change from the source image due to corrections. In that case, deselect
the checkbox and scan.
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.

Correct fading
Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.

Reduce gutter shadow

Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

Important
• For precautions on using this function, refer to "Gutter Shadow Correction."

Color Pattern...
Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to
colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.

Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern

598
 Important
• This setting is not available when you select Color Matching on the Color Settings tab of
the Preferences dialog box.

Perform Scan
Scan
Starts scanning.

Note
• When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.

Preferences...
Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings.

Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).

(2) Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.

In thumbnail view:

In whole image view:

(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)

Switches the view in the Preview area.

(3) Preview Area

(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.

(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.

• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.

• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.

(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas
within the cropping frame.

599
 (Check All Frames)
Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Selects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Uncheck All Frames)

Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Deselects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Select All Frames)

Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.

(Select All Cropping Frames)

Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.

Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.

(Remove Cropping Frame)

Removes the selected cropping frame.

(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).

(Open Guide)
Opens this page.

(3) Preview Area

This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings
(image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in "(1) Settings and Operation Buttons."

When (Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images are
displayed. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.

600
 Note
• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.

• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl
key.
• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.

• Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the
screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the display to its
non-magnified state.

When (Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will
be scanned.

Note
• You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create
one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.

Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

Related Topic
Scanning in Basic Mode

601
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image
brightness, and color tone.

This section describes the settings and functions available on the Advanced Mode tab.

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area

Note
• The displayed items vary by document type and view.
• The preview function is not available when scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).

(1) Settings and Operation Buttons

Favorite Settings
You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings, and
Color Adjustment Buttons) on the Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to
save a group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default
settings.

Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu to open the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box.

602
 Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Favorite Settings List.

When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.

To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save the settings
displayed in Favorite Settings List.

Note
• You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.
• Save up to 10 items.

Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.

Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.

Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.

Color Adjustment Buttons

Fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones can be made including adjustments to the
image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and shadow values (histogram)
or balance (tone curve).

Zoom
Zooms in on a frame, or zooms in on the image in the area specified with a cropping frame (scan
area). When zoomed in, Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-
magnified state.

In thumbnail view:

When multiple images are displayed in thumbnail view, clicking this button zooms in on the selected

frame. Click (Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to display the previous or next
frame.

Note
• You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again to
return the display to its non-magnified state.

In whole image view:

Rescans the image in the area specified with a cropping frame at higher magnification.

Note
• Zoom rescans the document and displays high-resolution image in Preview.

• (Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the
resolution of the displayed image will be low.

Preview
Performs a trial scan.

603
Scan
Starts scanning.

Note
• When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
• When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may appear.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, refer to Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
in Scan Tab (Preferences dialog box).
• It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain
size. In that case, a warning message appears; it is recommended that you reduce the total size.
To continue, scan in whole image view.

Preferences...
Opens the Preferences dialog box in which you can make scan/preview settings.

Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).

(2) Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.

In thumbnail view:

In whole image view:

(Thumbnail) / (Whole Image)

Switches the view in the Preview area.

604
 (3) Preview Area

(Clear)
Deletes the preview image from the Preview area.

It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.

(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.

(Move Image)
Allows you to drag the image until the part you want to see is displayed when an image enlarged in
the Preview area does not fit in the screen. You can also move the image using the scroll bars.

(Enlarge/Reduce)
Allows you to zoom in on the Preview area by clicking the image. Right-click the image to zoom out.

(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.

• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.

(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.

• The result will be reflected in the scanned image.

• The image returns to its original state when you preview again.

(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in the
Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are croppable areas
within the cropping frame.

(Check All Frames)

Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Selects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Uncheck All Frames)

Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Deselects the checkboxes of the image in thumbnail view.

(Select All Frames)

Available when two or more frames are displayed.

Selects the images in thumbnail view and outlines them in blue.

(Select All Cropping Frames)

Available when two or more cropping frames are specified.

Turns the cropping frames into thick broken lines and applies the settings to all of them.

605
 (Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.

(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear and the current scan settings (document type, etc.).

(Open Guide)
Opens this page.

(3) Preview Area

This is where a trial image appears after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the settings
(image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in "(1) Settings and Operation Buttons."

When (Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Cropping frames are specified according to the document size, and thumbnails of scanned images are
displayed. Only the images with the checkbox selected will be scanned.

Note
• When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.

• Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
• Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and Selected
Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl
key.
• Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.

When (Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar:

Items on the Platen are scanned and displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will
be scanned.

606
 Note
• You can specify the cropping frame on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can only create
one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) in Advanced Mode

607
Input Settings

Input Settings allows you to set the following items:

Select Source
The type of document to be scanned is displayed. To scan from the Platen, select Platen; to scan from
the ADF (Auto Document Feeder), select Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex).

Important
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF. For details, refer to the
application's manual.

Note
• You can select Document (ADF Duplex) when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.

Paper Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole image view only.

When scanning both sides of the documents automatically from the ADF, select A4 or Letter.

When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.

Important
• Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. Available scan range
is as follows.

• 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less

• If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.

Note
• If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then

measure the size of the document and enter the values into (Width) and (Height).

Original Orientation
Set the orientation and stapling side of the documents to scan from the ADF.

608
 Click Settings... to open the Orientation dialog box.

Important
• The Orientation dialog box can only be opened when Select Source is Document (ADF
Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex).
• Binding Location is displayed when using a model supporting ADF duplex scanning.
• Binding Location cannot be specified when Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex).

Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.

Color
Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the image
in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).

Grayscale
Select this mode to scan black and white photos or to create black and white images. This mode
renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.

Black and White

Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white. This mode renders the image
in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level) into black

and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with (Threshold).

Input Size
In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview.

In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area)
size is displayed after preview.

You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into (Width) and (Height).

Click (Change Aspect Ratio) and change it to (Keep Aspect Ratio) to maintain the aspect ratio
when you specify the cropping frame size.

Important
• Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you
select a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output
Resolution is displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed.

609
 Note
• The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum size
is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100 %.
• When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since
the size will be prioritized.
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for details on cropping frames.

610
Output Settings

Output Settings allows you to set the following items:

Output Resolution
Select the resolution to scan at.

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.

Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value in 1 dpi
increments.

Refer to "Resolution" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

When Select Source is Platen:

You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi.

When Select Source is Document (ADF Simplex) or Document (ADF Duplex):

You can enter a value within the range of 25 dpi to 600 dpi.

Output Size
Select an output size.

Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set
custom size and save it as a new output size option.

Flexible
You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frames (scan areas).

In thumbnail view:

Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is displayed,
the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is displayed, each
frame is scanned individually.

611
 In whole image view:

When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.

Note

• To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into (Width) and (Height) in
Output Settings or specify a value (by 1 %) for %. Although the maximum value available for
% depends on the Output Resolution, it can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum
available output resolution).

Paper Size (L, A4, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)

(Width), (Height), and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped
according to the selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be
scanned at the size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to
enlarge, reduce, or move it while maintaining the aspect ratio.

Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.

In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along
with the predefined items.

Adding:

Select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width, and Height,
then click Add. For Unit, you can select inches or mm when Destination is Print but you can only
select pixels when Destination is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output
Size List. Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.

Deleting:

Select the output size you want to delete in Output Size List, then click Delete. Click Save to save
the items listed in Output Size List.

Important
• You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.

Note
• Save up to 10 items for each destination.
• An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the range displayed in the message.

612
 Note
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for details on cropping frames.
• For details on whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image, refer to
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" (Preferences dialog box).

(Switch Aspect Ratio)

Available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.

Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.

Data Size
The data size when scanned with the current settings is displayed.

Note
• When the data size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning
message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce
Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.

613
Image Settings

Important
• Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches, or faded colors. The color tone
may be adversely affected.
• Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image.

Note
• Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.
• Scanning may take longer than usual when you use Image Settings.

Image Settings allows you to set the following items:

Image Adjustment
When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized. Images
can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified document type.
The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image.

None
Image Adjustment will not be applied.

Auto
Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that
you normally select this setting.

Photo
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for photos.

Magazine
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for magazines.

Document
Applies Image Adjustment suitable for text documents.

Important
• You can set Image Adjustment after preview.

614
 • You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.

Note
• If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type.
• The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set
Image Adjustment to None.

Reduce Show-through
Use this function to reduce show-through in duplex documents or lighten the base color in recycled
paper and other colored paper when scanning documents.

OFF
Show-through will not be reduced.
ON
Select this to reduce show-through in duplex documents or lighten the base color. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.

Important
• Reduce Show-through can be set when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of
the Preferences dialog box and Document or Magazine is selected for Image Adjustment.

Unsharp Mask
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image when scanning photos.

OFF
Unsharp Mask will not be applied.

ON
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. It is recommended that you normally
select this setting.

Descreen
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.

OFF
Moire will not be reduced.

ON
Reduces moire. It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

Note
• Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In
that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF.

Reduce Dust and Scratches

Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches. Use this function to reduce such
noise.

None
Dust and scratches will not be reduced.

Low
Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain.

615
 Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Select this to reduce large dust particles and scratches; however, evidence of the reduction
process may remain or delicate parts of the image may be removed.

Important
• This function may not be effective for some types of photos.

Note
• It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.

Fading Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. "Colorcast" is a
phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong
colors.

None
Fading Correction will not be applied.

Low
Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast.

Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image.

Important
• You can set Fading Correction after preview.
• You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.

Grain Correction
Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film.
None
Graininess will not be reduced.

Low
Select this when the photo is slightly grainy.

Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the
image.

Important
• Correction may not be applied properly if the scan area is too small.

Gutter Shadow Correction

Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.

616
When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.
Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is
pressed.

Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected.

None
Gutter shadow will not be corrected.

Low
Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting.

Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.

High
Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting.

Important
• You can set Gutter Shadow Correction after preview.
• Do not place objects that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the platen. Also, do not press on the
document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work
correctly or you might break the glass.
• Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly.

• Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is not
white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all.
• While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview
the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly.

• How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned.

Note
• Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan
results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen.
• If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview
image.

617
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)

618
Color Adjustment Buttons
The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones
including adjustments to the image's overall brightness or contrast and adjustments to its highlight and
shadow values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).

Important
• The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.

Note
• Selectable settings depend on Color Mode settings.
• When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the preview
image.

Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items:

(Saturation/Color Balance)
Adjust the saturation (vividness) and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that
have faded with time or due to colorcast. "Colorcast" is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the
entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.

Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance

(Brightness/Contrast)
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image
quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast.

Adjusting Brightness and Contrast

619
 (Histogram)
A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can
specify the brightest level (highlight) and darkest level (shadow) within an image, cut the levels and
expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.

Adjusting Histogram

(Tone Curve Settings)

Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of
tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area.
Adjusting Tone Curve

(Final Review)
Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived
from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this screen.

• For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green, or Blue, or select Master
to check three colors together.
• If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only
L when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed.

(Threshold)
Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you
can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.

Setting Threshold

Custom
You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons.

Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu; when Color Mode is set to anything but Black and
White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens; when Color Mode is Black and
White, the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens.

620
 Enter Setting Name and click Add; the name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold
Settings List. Click Save to save.

To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Click Save to save the settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List.
You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the
settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu.

Note
• Save up to 20 items.

Defaults
Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram, and tone curve).

621
Preferences Dialog Box
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions via
the Scanner, Preview, Scan, and Color Settings tabs.

Click Preferences... in the ScanGear screen to open the Preferences dialog box.

Scanner Tab
Allows you to set the quiet mode, specify the folder in which to save images temporarily, and set the
music file to play during or at the end of a scan.

Preview Tab
Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear is started, how to display cropping frames
after previewing images, and the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents.

Scan Tab
Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear after scanning image.

Color Settings Tab

Allows you to select how to adjust color, and specify the monitor gamma value.

622
Scanner Tab
On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings.

Important
• Available functions and settings vary depending on your scanner or printer.

Auto Power Settings

You can set to turn the machine on or off automatically.

Click Settings... to display the Auto Power Settings dialog box.

Note
• If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear because
the computer cannot collect the machine status. In that case, click OK to exit ScanGear (scanner
driver).

Auto Power On
Select Enable to turn on the machine automatically when data is received.

Auto Power Off

Specify the amount of time you want to set from the list. When this time lapses without any data
being received, the machine turns off automatically.

Important
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the power does not turn
off automatically even if Auto Power Off is set.

623
Quiet Settings
The silent function allows you to reduce the operating noise of this machine. Use this when you wish to
reduce the operating noise such as when scanning or printing at night.

Click Settings... to set the quiet mode.

Note
• You can set the quiet mode from the operation panel of the machine, the printer driver, or
ScanGear.
No matter how the setting is made, it applies to operations from the operation panel of the machine
or when printing/scanning from a computer, etc.
• Scanning or printing may take longer than usual when this function is used.

Do not use quiet mode

Select this option when you wish to use the machine with volume of normal operating noise.

Always use quiet mode

Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine.

Use quiet mode during specified hours

Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine during a specified
period of time.

Set the Start time and End time during which quiet mode is to be activated.

Important
• The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different.
• If your scanner or printer does not support fax functions, quiet mode is not applied to
operations (copy, direct print, etc.) performed directly from the machine even if the hours are
specified.

Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved

Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.

Sound Settings
You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan.

Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox,
then click Browse... and specify a sound file.

You can specify the following files.

• MIDI file (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi)
• Audio file (*.wav, *.aif, *.aiff)
• MP3 file (*.mp3)

624
Calibration Settings
When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before
previewing and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images.

Note
• Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in
some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on).
• Calibration may take time depending on your computer.

625
Preview Tab
On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings.

Preview at Start of ScanGear

Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started.

Automatically Execute Preview

ScanGear will automatically start previewing at startup.

Display Saved Preview Image

The previously previewed image will be displayed.

The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings
are also saved.

None
No preview image will be displayed at startup.

Note
• Select None if you do not want to save the preview image.

Cropping Frame on Previewed Images

Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images.

Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images

The cropping frame (scan area) will automatically be displayed in the document size after
previewing.

Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images

A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after
previewing.

None
No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.

Cropping Size for Thumbnail View

Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents.

626
Larger
Displays 105 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.

Standard
The standard size.

Smaller
Displays 95 % (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.

Note
• When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be
refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color
adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.

627
Scan Tab
On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings.

Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning

Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images.

Close ScanGear automatically

Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.

Do not close ScanGear automatically

Select this to return to the ScanGear screen for another scan when scanning is completed.

Display the dialog to select next action

Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed.

Note
• Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set,
some applications may not support it.

628
Color Settings Tab
On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.

Color Adjustment

Select one of the following.

Recommended
Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you
normally select this setting.

Color Matching
Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor, and color printer colors, thus reducing time and
trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors.

Source(Scanner)
Select scanner profile.

Target
Select target profile.

Monitor
Select this checkbox to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor.

Defaults
Returns to the default Color Matching settings.

Note
• The Color Adjustment Buttons on the Advanced Mode tab are not available when you select
Color Matching.
• This function is available when Color Mode is Color.

None
Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver).

629
 Note
• Depending on your scanner or printer, this setting may not be available when scanning from the ADF
(Auto Document Feeder).
• You can select one when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale.
• Color Matching is available when ScanGear, monitor, color management-compliant application (such as
Adobe Photoshop), and printer are set up correctly.

Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer, and application settings.

Monitor Gamma
By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness characteristics
of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the default value set in
ScanGear, and the colors of the original image are not accurately reflected in the monitor.

Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20).

Note
• Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual,
contact the manufacturer.

630
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place
items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.

Important
• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall
into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) when opening/closing the
document cover. May result in unintended operation.

Placing Items (Platen)

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))

Placing Items (Platen)

Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type or size automatically.

Important
• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot
be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.

For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, or BD/DVD/CD For Magazines, Newspapers, or Documents

Place the item face-down on the platen and align an

Placing a Single Item:
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow
Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 cm) (alignment mark) of the platen. Portions placed on the
or more space between the edges (diagonally striped area) diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
of the platen and the item. Portions placed on the
diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Important
• Refer to "Loading Originals" for your model from
Important
Home of the Online Manual for details on the
• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be portions in which items cannot be scanned.
placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of

631
 the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a
format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data
format.

Placing Multiple Items:

Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges

(diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and
between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped
area cannot be scanned.

more than 0.4 inch (1 cm)

Note
• You can place up to 12 items.
• You can place up to four items when the Compress
scanned images upon transfer checkbox is selected
in the Settings dialog box of IJ Scan Utility.
• With network connection, items may not be scanned
correctly when five or more items are placed. In that
case, reduce the number of items placed on the platen
to four or less, then scan again.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are
corrected automatically.

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))

Important
• Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF. May result in paper jam.
• Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents.
• Refer to "Originals You Can Load" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details on
supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF.

1. Open the document tray.

632
2. Place the documents on the ADF, then adjust the document guides to the width of the
documents.
Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds.

Note
• When scanning duplex documents, place the front sides facing up. They will not be scanned in
the correct page order if placed the other way around.

633
Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)
"Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when
scanning it.

On the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab, you can specify cropping frames (scan areas) on the
image(s) displayed in the Preview area of the screen.

When you perform a scan, each area specified with a cropping frame will be scanned as a separate image.

Note
• In whole image view, you can specify multiple cropping frames on the preview image.
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window" for your model from Home of the
Online Manual for how to adjust cropping frames with IJ Scan Utility.

Initial Cropping Frame

In thumbnail view:

No cropping frame is specified. You can drag the mouse over a thumbnail to specify a cropping frame.

In whole image view:

An active cropping frame is automatically specified around the preview image. You can drag the cropping
frame in the Preview area to specify the area.

Note
• You can change the auto crop setting in the Preferences dialog box. Refer to Cropping Frame on
Previewed Images in "Preview Tab" for details.

Cropping Frame Types

(1) Thick cropping frame (rotating or stationary)

Represents a selected cropping frame. Appears only in whole image view. You can select multiple
cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key. Output size, image corrections, and
other settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab will be applied to all the selected
cropping frames.

(2) Thin cropping frame

In thumbnail view:

Output size, image corrections, and other settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode tab
will be applied.

634
 In whole image view:

Represents an unselected cropping frame. The settings on the Basic Mode tab or Advanced Mode
tab will not be applied.

Adjusting a Cropping Frame

The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you
click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract
accordingly.

The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and
drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.

Note

• On the Advanced Mode tab, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into

(Width) and (Height) in Input Settings.

• You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking (Switch Aspect Ratio). However,
(Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.

Creating Multiple Cropping Frames

In thumbnail view:

You can only create one cropping frame per image.

635
In whole image view:

Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame
in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the active cropping frame, and the old cropping frame
will be the unselected cropping frame.

You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame.

You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.

If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear, the
settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.

When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.

Note
• Create up to 12 cropping frames.
• Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected.

Deleting Cropping Frames

In thumbnail view:

To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image.

636
In whole image view:

To delete a cropping frame, select it and click (Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar.
Alternatively, press the Delete key.

When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (active cropping frame and
selected cropping frames) are deleted simultaneously.

637
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using it.

Scanner Driver Restrictions

• When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the
TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's
administrator for help.
• Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from
standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.
• Do not connect two or more scanner or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same
computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the
operation panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.
• Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow these
steps and scan again.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Exit ScanGear, then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect it.
3. Turn on the machine.

• ScanGear cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an application,
ScanGear cannot be opened for the second time when it is already open.
• Be sure to close the ScanGear window before closing the application.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, the machine cannot be
accessed from multiple computers at the same time.
• When using a network compatible model by connecting to a network, scanning takes longer than
usual.
• Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high
resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600
dpi in full-color.
• ScanGear and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
• Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.

Applications with Restrictions on Use

• If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005, you may not be able to
scan using the operation panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer.
• You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005.
Scan with other applications such as IJ Scan Utility.
• Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's
manual and change the settings accordingly.
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only
the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image. For such
applications, do not scan multiple documents from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder).
• To import scanned images into Microsoft Office 2000, first save them using IJ Scan Utility, then import
the saved files from the Insert menu.
• When scanning Platen size images into Microsoft Office 2003 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, etc.), click
Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise, images may not
be scanned correctly.
• When scanning images into Microsoft Office 2007/Microsoft Office 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint,
etc.), use Microsoft Clip Organizer.

638
• Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating
system's virtual memory and retry.
• When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your computer
may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0 % depending on the application. In that case,
cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the operating
system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan the image
via IJ Scan Utility first, then save and import it into the application.

639
Useful Information on Scanning
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window
Resolution
Data Formats
Color Matching

640
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window
"Cropping" is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in an image and discarding the rest when
scanning it.

In the Image Stitch window, you can specify a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area.

Note
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for
how to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver).

Initial Cropping Frame

No cropping frame is specified. When you select the Adjust cropping frames checkbox, an active
cropping frame is automatically specified around the image in the Preview area. You can drag the
cropping frame to specify the area.

When you perform a scan, the image in the area specified with the cropping frame will be scanned.

Adjusting a Cropping Frame

The cursor will change into (Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. Click and
drag the mouse to expand or contract the cropping frame.

The cursor will change into (Crosshair Arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click and
drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.

Deleting Cropping Frames

To delete the cropping frame, deselect the Adjust cropping frames checkbox.

641
Resolution
The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and
color. The density of these dots is called "resolution," and resolution will determine the amount of detail your
image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per inch (2.5 cm).

The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less
detail.

How to Set the Resolution

You can set the resolution in the following screens.

IJ Scan Utility:

Resolution on the (Scanning from a Computer) tab of the Settings dialog box

ScanGear (Scanner Driver):

Output Resolution in Output Settings on the Advanced Mode tab

Appropriate Resolution Settings

Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image.

Appropriate
Item Type Use Color Mode
Resolution

Copying
Color 300 dpi
(Printing)

Creating a postcard Color 300 dpi

Color photo
Saving to a computer Color 300 dpi

Using on a website or attaching

Color 150 dpi
to e-mail

Saving to a computer Grayscale 300 dpi

Black and white photo Using on a website or attaching
Grayscale 150 dpi
to e-mail

Color, Grayscale, or
Copying 300 dpi
Black and White
Text document (document or
Color, Grayscale, or
magazine) Attaching to e-mail 150 dpi
Black and White

Scanning text using OCR Color or Grayscale 300 dpi

642
 Important
• If you double the resolution, the data size of the scanned image quadruples. If the file is too large, the
processing speed will slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of
memory. Set the minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.

Note
• When you will be printing the scanned image by enlarging it, scan by setting a higher resolution than
the recommended one above.

643
Data Formats
You can select a data format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable data
format according to how you want to use the image on which application.

Available data formats vary by application and operating system (Windows or Mac OS).

See below for the characteristics of each image data format.

PNG (Standard File Extension: .png)

A data format often used on websites.

PNG is suitable for editing saved images.

JPEG (Standard File Extension: .jpg)

A data format often used on websites and for digital camera images.

JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and
cannot be returned to their original state.
JPEG is not available for black and white images.

TIFF (Standard File Extension: .tif)

A data format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications.

TIFF is suitable for editing saved images.

Note
• Some TIFF files are incompatible.
• IJ Scan Utility supports the following TIFF file formats.

• Uncompressed, black and white binary

• Uncompressed, RGB (8 bits per channel)
• Uncompressed, Grayscale

PDF (Standard File Extension: .pdf)

A data format for electronic documents, developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated.

It can be used on various computers and operating systems, and fonts can be embedded as well; therefore,
people in different environments can exchange the files without being aware of the differences.

644
Color Matching
"Color Matching" is the act of making adjustments so that the color tones match between the original item,
the monitor display, and the color printout. On your scanner or printer, the color tones are adjusted as
shown below.

Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target):

The image's color space is converted from the scanner's color space to sRGB by ScanGear.

When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color space
based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings.

When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the
application's print settings and the printer driver's settings.

645
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX allows you to select the scanners or printers to be used for scanning or
printing over a network from your computer or the operation panel.

After installation, IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears in the notification area on the desktop.

Important
• If you cannot scan over a network, download and upgrade to the latest MP Drivers from our website.
• While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it
can communicate with your scanner or printer over the network. When using the computer in a network
environment other than the one used to set up your scanner or printer, disable IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX.

Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to start.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX on the Start screen.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm,
then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".

• Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX >
IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

Menu
Displays a menu when you right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) in the notification area on the
desktop.

Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX / Enable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX
Enables or disables IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

When you select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, you will not be able to scan over
a network from the operation panel.

Enabled: , Disabled:

Important
• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, you
cannot scan using the operation panel even if this setting is enabled.

Settings...
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears. You can select the model you want to use.

About
Displays the version information.

In the displayed dialog box, you can change the language to be used in the application. The change
will be reflected after restarting the computer.

646
Exit
Exits IJ Network Scanner Selector EX; (Enabled) or (Disabled) disappears from the
notification area on the desktop.

Scan-from-PC Settings Screen

Right-click the icon from the notification area on the desktop, then select Settings... to display the Scan-
from-PC Settings screen.

Your scanner or printer must be selected with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX before scanning over a
network.

Scanners
MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.

You can select one scanner or printer per model. Selecting a scanner or printer automatically enables
scanning from the operation panel.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings
The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears. You can select up to three scanners and
printers in total for scanning from the operation panel. You can scan items using the operation panel
of the selected scanner or printer, and send the scanned images to your computer over a network.

Important
• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, that
model does not appear in Scanners and the setting is not available.

Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings Screen

Click Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen to display the Scan-
from-Operation-Panel Settings screen.

Scanners
MAC addresses of the scanners or printers that can be used over the network are displayed.

You can select up to three scanners and printers in total at the same time. Selecting a scanner or
printer automatically enables scanning from the operation panel.

Instructions
Opens this guide.

Important
• When using a model with which you cannot scan over a network from the operation panel, Scan-
from-Operation-Panel Settings may appear in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen; however, the
setting is not available.

Note
• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then
reopen it and try selecting again.

• MP Drivers is installed
• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers

647
 • Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled

If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for
your model from Home of the Online Manual.

• You do not need to use this software when scanning via USB. Refer to "Uninstalling IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX" to delete it. You can scan via USB even if it is not deleted.

648
Uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX
Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX from your computer.

Important
• You cannot scan over a network after uninstalling IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.
• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.

1. Uninstall IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and
Features.

2. Double-click Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

Note
• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• Windows 7/Windows Vista:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and
Features.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then click Uninstall/Change.

Note
• If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• Windows XP:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then click Change/Remove.

2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.

3. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.

Note
• When the message prompting you to restart your computer appears, click OK to restart your
computer.

649
Other Scanning Methods
Scanning with WIA Driver
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)

650
Scanning with WIA Driver
You can scan an item from a WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)-compliant application.

WIA is a driver model implemented in Windows XP or later. It allows you to scan items without using an
application.

The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only.

Refer to the application's manual for details.

Important
• In Windows XP, you cannot scan using the WIA driver via a network connection.
• Some applications do not support continuous scanning from the ADF (Auto Document Feeder). Refer to
the application's manual for details.
• Follow these steps to enable scanning over a network.
The setting may have been completed already depending on your environment. In that case, Uninstall
appears.

1. Follow the procedure below to open Network.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Select the Search charm, then click Network displayed by searching
for "Network".
• Windows 7: From the Start menu, select Computer > Network.
• Windows Vista: From the Start menu, select Network.

2. Right-click XXX_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name) in the displayed screen, then
select Install.

Scanning with WIA Driver 2.0

The following is an example of scanning using "Windows Fax and Scan."

1. Place the item on the platen or ADF.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

2. Select New on the File menu of "Windows Fax and Scan," then click Scan....
The scan setting screen appears.

Note
• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Double-
click the scanner you want to use.
• For USB connection: Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name)
• For network connection: XXX series_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name)

3. Specify the settings.

Scanner
The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select
the product you want to use.

651
 Profile
Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the type of item to be scanned. To save a
new Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box.

Source
Select a scanner type. To scan from the platen, select Flatbed. To scan from the ADF, select
Feeder (Scan one side).
Paper size
Select the paper size. Paper size can be set only when Source is Feeder (Scan one side).
Color format
Select the color mode in which to scan the item.
File type
Select a data format from JPEG, BMP, PNG, and TIFF.
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution

Note
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be
specified.
150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi

Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).

Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).

Preview or scan images as separate files

Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files.

Important
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness,
Contrast, and Preview or scan images as separate files.

4. Click Preview to preview the image.

The preview image appears on the right.

Important
• With network connection, scan without preview when scanning documents from the ADF. If you
preview, place the document again and scan.
If there is document left in the ADF after previewing, press the OK button on the operation
panel and remove the document.

5. Click Scan.
Scanning starts, then the scanned image appears in the application.

652
Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0
The following is an example of scanning using "Paint."

1. Place the item on the platen or ADF.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

2. Click From scanner or camera from the File menu of Paint. (Select the command to
scan an item in the application.)

Note
• If you have more than one scanner or printer, a scanner selection screen may appear. Double-
click the scanner you want to use.

• For USB connection: Canon XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name)
• For network connection: XXX series_MAC address (where "XXX" is the model name)

3. Select the paper source and type of picture according to the item to be scanned.
To scan from the platen, select Flatbed for Paper source. To scan from the ADF, select Document
Feeder.

Select the type of picture from Color picture, Grayscale picture, Black and white picture or text,
and Custom Settings.

Note
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the options for the type of picture
may differ from those displayed with USB connection.
• To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select
Custom Settings.
• Selecting Document Feeder for Paper source enables you to select Page size.

4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required.
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.

Resolution

Note
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, the following resolutions can be
specified.
150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi

653
 Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your item.

Reset
Click to restore the original settings.

Important
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and
Contrast.

5. Click Preview to preview the image.

The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area.

Important
• With network connection, scan without preview when scanning documents from the ADF. If you
preview, place the document again and scan.
If there is document left in the ADF after previewing, press the OK button on the operation
panel and remove the document.

6. Click Scan.
Scanning starts, then the scanned image appears in the application.

654
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver.

Important
• When using the scanner or printer with network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver.

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.

2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click Canon
XXX series (where "XXX" is the model name).
The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click Next.

4. Select Picture type according to the item to be scanned.

To scan from the platen, select Flatbed for Paper source. To scan from the ADF (Auto Document
Feeder), select Document Feeder.

Note
• To scan with the values previously set in Custom settings, select Custom.
• Selecting Document Feeder for Paper source enables you to select Page size.

5. Click Custom settings to set the preferences as required.

655
 Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).

Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your item.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.

6. Click Preview to preview the image.

The preview image appears on the right. Drag to specify the scan area.

7. Click Next and follow the instructions.

656
Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)
Learn how to place items on the platen or ADF (Auto Document Feeder) of your scanner or printer. Place
items correctly according to the type of item to be scanned. Otherwise, items may not be scanned correctly.

Important
• Do not place objects on the document cover. When you open the document cover, the objects may fall
into your scanner or printer, resulting in malfunction.
• Close the document cover when scanning.
• Do not touch the operation panel buttons or LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor when opening/closing
the document cover. May result in unintended operation.

Placing Items (Platen)

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))

Placing Items (Platen)

Place items as described below to scan by detecting the item type or size automatically.

Important
• When scanning by specifying the paper size in IJ Scan Utility or ScanGear (scanner driver), align an
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen.
• Photos that have been cut to various shapes and items smaller than 1.2 inches (3 cm) square cannot
be cropped accurately when scanning.
• Reflective disc labels may not be scanned as expected.

For Photos, Postcards, Business Cards, or BD/DVD/CD For Magazines, Newspapers, or Documents

Place the item face-down on the platen and align an

Placing a Single Item:
upper corner of the item with the corner at the arrow
Place the item face-down on the platen, with 0.4 inch (1 (alignment mark) of the platen. Portions placed on the
cm) or more space between the edges (diagonally striped diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
area) of the platen and the item. Portions placed on the
diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.

Important
• Refer to "Loading Originals" for your model from
Important
Home of the Online Manual for details on the
• Large items (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be portions in which items cannot be scanned.
placed away from the edges/arrow (alignment mark) of

657
 the platen may be saved as PDF files. To save in a
format other than PDF, scan by specifying the data
format.

Placing Multiple Items:

Allow 0.4 inch (1 cm) or more space between the edges

(diagonally striped area) of the platen and items, and
between items. Portions placed on the diagonally striped
area cannot be scanned.

more than 0.4 inch (1 cm)

Note
• You can place up to 12 items.
• Positions of slanted items (10 degrees or less) are
corrected automatically.

Placing Documents (ADF (Auto Document Feeder))

Important
• Do not leave thick items on the platen when scanning from the ADF. May result in paper jam.
• Place and align documents of the same size when scanning two or more documents.
• Refer to "Originals You Can Load" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details on
supported document sizes when scanning from the ADF.

1. Open the document tray.

2. Place the documents on the ADF, then adjust the document guides to the width of the
documents.
Insert the documents face-up until a beep sounds.

658
659
Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation Panel of the
Machine Basic
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Network Scan Settings
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using IJ Scan
Utility

660
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer Using the Operation
Panel of the Machine
Before forwarding scanned data to the computer, confirm the following:

• MP Drivers are installed.

If MP Drivers are not yet installed, install MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.

• The machine is connected to a computer correctly.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.

Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is in operation, or when the computer is in the
sleep or standby mode.

If you perform scanning via a network connection, make sure that all the required settings have been
specified.

Network Scan Settings

• The destination and the file name are specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.

You can specify the destination and the file name in Canon IJ Scan Utility. For details on settings of
Canon IJ Scan Utility:

Settings Dialog Box

Follow the procedure below to forward scanned data to the computer.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the SCAN button.

If you forward the scanned data to a computer for the first time, the Scan menu screen is displayed. Go
to step 3.

If you have forwarded the scanned data to a computer, the Scan standby screen is displayed.

* The Scan standby screen for USB-connected computer

If you change the destination or scan settings, press the Menu button, then go to step 3.

Go to step 8 if you do not change the destination or scan settings.

3. Use the button to select Save to, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select the computer to forward the scanned data, then press the OK
button.
If you forward the data to the USB-connected computer, select Local (USB).

661
 If you forward the data to the LAN-connected computer, select a name of the computer to forward the
scanned data.

Note
• If you select Search again and press the OK button, the machine starts searching for the
connected computers again.
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols
supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista), select Active for WSD
scan from dev. on WSD setting on Other settings in LAN settings under Device settings.

5. Make sure that Document type is selected, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select the document type, then press the OK button.

Note
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer searched using WSD, you cannot select the
document type.
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

Auto scan
The machine detects the type of the originals automatically and the image is forwarded in the
optimized size, resolution and data format.

Important
• Load originals properly according to their type; otherwise, some originals may not be scanned
properly.

For details on how to load the original:

Loading Originals

• The following items can be scanned:

Photos, postcards, visiting cards, magazines, newspapers, documents, BD/DVD/CDs

• The following items cannot be scanned properly.

• A4 sized photos

• Documents smaller than 5 inches x 7 inches (127 mm x 178 mm) such as a paperback with its
backbone cut off
• Originals on thin white paper

• Long and narrow originals such as panoramic photographs

• When you scan originals from the ADF, it may take longer to scan the first page.

Document
Scans the original on the platen glass or in the ADF applying the optimized settings for scanning a
document.

Photo
Scans the original on the platen glass as a photo data applying the optimized settings for scanning a
photo.

662
7. Specify the scan settings.
Specify each scan setting in order.

Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.
Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.

Note
• For details on each setting item:
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine

• Go to step 8 when Auto scan is selected for Document type.

The Scan standby screen is displayed after all the settings have been specified.

8. Load the original document on the platen glass or in the ADF.

9. Press the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white scanning.

Note
• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD, press the Color button.

• If the original is not loaded properly, a message is displayed on the LCD. Load the original on the
platen glass or in the ADF according to the scan settings.

• If you load the original in the ADF:

The machine starts scanning and scanned data is forwarded to the computer.

• If you load the original on the platen glass:

◦ When you select JPEG or TIFF for Data format, the machine starts scanning and scanned
data is forwarded to the computer.
◦ When you select PDF or Compact PDF for Data format, the confirmation screen asking you if
you continue scanning is displayed after scanning is complete.

Selecting Yes and pressing the OK button allow you to scan the originals continuously. Load
the next document on the platen glass and start scanning.

By selecting No and pressing the OK button, scanning is complete and the data is forwarded
to the computer in one PDF file.

Scanned data is forwarded to the computer according to the settings specified in Canon IJ Scan Utility.

Remove the original on the platen glass or from the document output slot after scanning is complete.

Important
• If the scanning result with Auto scan is not satisfactory, select Document or Photo according to
the original in step 6, then specify the scan size or other setting items in step 7.

663
When the program selection screen is displayed:
• If you are using Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:

The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Color or Black button. In this
case, select Canon IJ Scan Utility and click OK.

• If you are using Windows XP:

The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Color or Black button for the first
time. In this case, specify Canon IJ Scan Utility as the application software to use, select Always
use this program for this action, then click OK. From the next time, Canon IJ Scan Utility is
automatically started.

If you want to scan originals with advanced settings, or if you want to edit
or print the scanned images:
If you scan originals from a computer using My Image Garden, My Image Garden enables you to edit the
scanned images, such as optimizing or trimming.
In addition, you can edit or print the scanned images using the compatible application software to make
better use of them.
Scanning Photos and Documents

Note
• You can use a WIA-compliant application software and the Control Panel (Windows XP only) to scan
originals with this machine.

For details:

Other Scanning Methods

• If you want to convert a scanned document to text:

Extracting Text from Scanned Images (OCR)

664
Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the
Machine
You can change the scan settings such as the scan size, resolution, or data format.

Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.

Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

• The scan setting cannot be specified under the following conditions:

• When Auto scan is selected for Document type to forward the scanned data to the computer

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer using WSD (one of the network protocols
supported in Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, and Windows Vista)

• Some setting items cannot be specified in combination with other setting items, the document type, or
the destination to save the data.

• The settings of the scan size, resolution, and data format are retained even if the machine is turned off.

• When you forward the scanned data to the computer, you can specify the destination and file name
using Canon IJ Scan Utility.

Settings Dialog Box

• If you scan originals from the computer, you can scan with advanced settings. For details on scanning
from the computer:

Scanning Photos and Documents

• Scan size

Select the size of the original.

Ex:

If you select Auto scan(A) -Singl, the machine detects the page size automatically and starts scanning.

If you select Auto scan(A) -Multi to save to the computer, you can scan several originals at a time.

Note
• When Legal is selected, load the original in the ADF.

• When 4"x6", 10x15, 5"x7", 13x18, or Auto scan(A) -Singl is selected, load the original on the
platen glass.

• Some of setting items are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.

• Data format

Select the data format of the scanned data.

Ex:

665
• Scan resolution

Select the resolution for scanning.

Ex:

666
Network Scan Settings
You can connect your scanner or printer to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images
into a specified computer.

Important
• Multiple users cannot scan at the same time.

Note
• Complete the network settings of your scanner or printer beforehand from the Setup CD-ROM or by
following the instructions on the web page.
• With network connection, scanning takes longer than USB connection.

Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.

Specifying Your Scanner or Printer

Use IJ Network Scanner Selector EX to specify the scanner you want to use. By specifying the scanner,
you can scan over a network from your computer or the operation panel.

Important
• If the product you want to use is changed with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, the product used for
scanning with IJ Scan Utility changes as well. The product for scanning from the operation panel also
changes.

If your scanner or printer is not selected in IJ Scan Utility, check that it is selected with IJ Network
Scanner Selector EX.

Refer to "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX Menu and Setting Screen" for your model from Home of
the Online Manual for details.

• To scan from the operation panel, specify your scanner or printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector
EX beforehand.

1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the
notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.

Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to
start.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX on the Start screen.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search
charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".

• Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

667
 The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen
appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.

2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX),
then select Settings....
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.

3. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners.

Normally, the MAC address of your scanner or printer is already selected after the network setup. In
that case, you do not need to select it again.

Important
• If multiple scanners exist on the network, multiple model names appear. In that case, you can
select one scanner per model.

4. Click OK.

Note
• The scanner selected in the Scan-from-PC Settings screen will be automatically selected in the Scan-
from-Operation-Panel Settings screen as well.

Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility

To scan from IJ Scan Utility using a scanner or printer connected to a network, specify your scanner or
printer with IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, then follow the steps below to change the connection status
between it and the computer.

1. Start IJ Scan Utility.

2. Select "Canon XXX series Network" (where "XXX" is the model name) for Product
Name.

3. Click Settings... to use another scanner connected to a network.

4. Click (General Settings), then click Select in Product Name.

The Scan-from-PC Settings screen of IJ Network Scanner Selector EX appears.

Select the scanner you want to use and click OK.

5. In the Settings (General Settings) dialog box, click OK.

The IJ Scan Utility main screen reappears. You can scan via a network connection.

Setting for Scanning from the Operation Panel

You can make the setting for scanning from the operation panel.

668
 Important
• Set IJ Scan Utility to use your scanner or printer via a network connection beforehand.

Setting for Scanning with IJ Scan Utility

1. Check that IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running.

If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is running, (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX) appears in the
notification area on the desktop. Click to check the hidden icons as well.

Note
• If the icon is not displayed in the notification area on the desktop, follow the procedure below to
start.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
Click IJ Network Scanner Selector EX on the Start screen.
If IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search
charm, then search for "IJ Network Scanner Selector EX".

• Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP:

From the Start menu, click All Programs > Canon Utilities > IJ Network Scanner
Selector EX > IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

The icon appears in the notification area on the desktop, and the Scan-from-PC Settings screen
appears. In that case, skip ahead to Step 3.

2. In the notification area on the desktop, right-click (IJ Network Scanner Selector EX),
then select Settings....
The Scan-from-PC Settings screen appears.

3. Click Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings.

The Scan-from-Operation-Panel Settings screen appears.

4. Select your scanner or printer from Scanners and click OK.

Select the MAC address of your scanner or printer.

Note
• When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners.

5. In the Scan-from-PC Settings screen, click OK.

Note
• If your scanner or printer does not appear, check the following, click OK to close the screen, then
reopen it and try selecting again.

• MP Drivers is installed
• Network settings of your scanner or printer is completed after installing the MP Drivers
• Network communication between your scanner or printer and computer is enabled

669
If your scanner or printer still does not appear, refer to "Problems with Network Communication" for
your model from Home of the Online Manual.

670
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel
Using IJ Scan Utility
IJ Scan Utility allows you to specify how to respond when scanning from the operation panel.

Note
• The screens for scanning with Auto Scan from the operation panel are used as examples in the
following descriptions.

1. Start IJ Scan Utility.

2. Click Settings....

The Settings dialog box appears.

3. Select a scan mode on the (Scanning from the Operation Panel) tab.

671
 Note
• Refer to the following for details.

Settings (Save to PC (Auto)) Dialog Box

Settings (Save to PC (Photo)) Dialog Box
Settings (Save to PC (Document)) Dialog Box

4. Set Scan Options.

5. Specify the file name and other settings in Save Settings.

672
6. Select the application you want to start after scanning in Application Settings.

673
7. Click OK.
The responses will be executed according to the specified settings when you start scanning from the
operation panel.

674
Faxing

Preparing for Faxing Sending Faxes Using the Operation Panel of

the Machine

Registering Recipients Receiving Faxes

Other Useful Fax Functions Sending Faxes from a Computer

675
Preparing for Faxing
Connect the machine to the telephone line and set up the machine before using the faxing functions. Then
specify the basic setting such as sender information, date/time, and daylight saving time.

Important
• If the Power Disconnects Unexpectedly:

If there is a power failure or if you accidentally unplug the power cord, the date/time settings will be
reset.

• The settings for user information and directory will be retained.

• All faxes stored in the machine's memory, such as unsent and received faxes, will be lost.
If the power disconnects, the following will apply:

• You will not be able to send or receive faxes, make copies, or scan originals.
• When you are connecting the telephone, whether or not you can use it depends upon your
telephone line or telephone.

Setting Up the Machine

The machine must be set up depending on your telephone line and use of the faxing function. Follow the
procedure below to set up the machine.

1. Connecting the Telephone Line

Connect the machine to your telephone line.

2. Setting the Telephone Line Type

Set the correct telephone line type for your telephone line.

3. Setting the Receive Mode

Set the receiving operation (receiving mode).

Note
• You can set the fax setting according to the instruction on the LCD.

Easy setup

If you set up according to the instruction on the LCD, the receive mode is set to TEL priority mode
or Fax only mode. To receive faxes with DRPD or Network switch, change the receive mode.

Setting the Receive Mode

Specifying the Basic Settings for Faxing

You can specify the basic setting such as sender information, date/time, and daylight saving time.
Setting the Sender Information

676
Connecting the Telephone Line
The connection method differs depending on your telephone line.

• If you connect the machine to wall telephone line directly/If you connect the machine with the xDSL
splitter:

Basic Connection

• If you connect the machine to another line such as an xDSL:

Connecting Various Lines

If the connection is incorrect, the machine cannot send/receive faxes. Connect the machine correctly.

Important
• Do not connect fax machines and/or telephones in parallel (US and Canada only).
If two or more fax machines and/or telephones are connected in parallel, the following problems may
occur and the machine may not operate properly.

• If you pick up the handset of the telephone that is connected in parallel during fax transmission or
reception, the fax image may be corrupted or a communication error may occur.

• Such services as Caller ID, etc. may not operate properly on the telephone.

If you cannot avoid parallel connections, set the receive mode to TEL priority mode, understanding
that the above problems may occur. You will only be able to receive faxes manually.

Basic Connection
Make sure that the machine is turned off, connect one end of supplied telephone line cable to the
telephone line jack near the "LINE" mark of the machine, then connect the other end to the telephone line
jack on the wall or to the telephone line jack of the xDSL splitter.

When you connect the telephone to the machine, make sure that the machine is turned off, connect one
end of the modular cable to the external device jack near the "EXT." mark of the machine, then connect
the other end to the telephone line jack of the telephone.

677
 Important
• Be sure to connect the telephone line before the machine is turned on.

If you connect the telephone line when the machine is turned on, turn the machine off and unplug the
power cord. Wait for 1 minute then connect the telephone line and power plug.

Note
• Refer to Rear View for the position of the telephone line jack and the external device jack.

• Before connecting a telephone or answering machine, remove the Telephone connector cap.

• For users in the UK:

If the connector of the external device cannot be connected to the jack on the machine, you will need
to purchase a B.T. adapter to connect as follows:
Attach the B.T. adapter to the modular cable connecting the external device, then connect the B.T.
adapter to the external device jack.

Connecting Various Lines

This section introduces how to connect various lines.

These are examples and could not be guaranteed to suit every connecting condition. For details, refer to
the instruction manual supplied with the network device (control devices such as an xDSL (Digital
Subscriber Line) modem or terminal adapter) you are connecting to this machine.

Note
• xDSL is the generic term for the high speed digital communication technology with telephone line
such as ADSL/HDSL/SDSL/VDSL.

• Connecting to an Internet Telephone

A. Digital Subscriber Line

B. xDSL modem (splitter may not be built-in to the modem)

C. Broadband router compatible with Internet Telephone

D. Computer

E. Telephone or answering machine

F. WAN (Wide Area Network) port

G. LAN (Local Area Network) port

H. TEL port

I. LINE port

* Port configurations and names may vary depending on the product.

678
 Note
• When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in
Telephone line type.
Setting the Telephone Line Type

• Connecting to an xDSL

A. Analog Subscriber Line

B. xDSL modem (splitter may not be built-in to the modem)

C. Computer

D. Telephone or answering machine

Important
• When the splitter is not built-in to the modem, do not branch the telephone line before the splitter
(wall side). And also, do not connect splitters in parallel. The machine may not be able to operate
properly.

Note
• When connecting to the xDSL line, select the same line type as you are subscribing to in
Telephone line type.

Setting the Telephone Line Type

• Connecting to an ISDN Line

For details on ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) connection and settings, refer to the manuals
supplied with your terminal adapter or dial-up router.

679
Setting the Telephone Line Type
Before using your machine, make sure you set the correct telephone line type for your telephone line. If you
are unsure of your telephone line type, contact your telephone company. For xDSL or ISDN connections,
contact the telephone company or service provider to confirm your line type.

Important
• For users in China
After plugging the power cord and turning on the machine, the telephone line type is selected
automatically. However, if the machine is connected to the control device such as an xDSL modem or
terminal adapter, the telephone line type may not be selected correctly.

In this case, set the line type manually.

For details on how to set the Telephone line type manually in China:
Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China

Note
• Telephone line type will not appear in countries or regions where Rotary pulse is not supported.

• You can print USER'S DATA LIST to check the current setting.

Summary of Reports and Lists

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Telephone line type, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select a telephone line type, then press the OK button.

Rotary pulse
Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing.

Touch tone
Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

7. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.

680
Setting the Telephone Line Type Manually in China
This section describes the procedure to set the telephone line type manually in China.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select TEL line auto select, then press the OK button.
The current telephone line type is displayed.

Note
• If you do not need to change the telephone line type, press the FAX button to return to the Fax
standby screen.

6. Use the button to select OFF, then press the OK button.

7. Use the button to select a telephone line type, then press the OK button.

Rotary pulse
Select when your telephone line type is pulse dialing.

Touch tone
Select when your telephone line type is tone dialing.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

8. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.

681
Setting the Receive Mode
Set the receiving operation (receiving mode).

For details on how to set the receive mode:

Setting the Receive Mode

You can select the appropriate mode.

For details on the selectable receive mode:

About the Receive Mode

For details on the advanced settings of the receive mode:

Advanced Settings of Receive Mode

Note
• The receiving operation procedure varies depending on the selected receive mode.
For details on receiving method depending on each receive mode:

Receiving Faxes
• If you want to use a single telephone line for faxes and voice calls, you need to connect a telephone or
an answering machine to the external device jack of this machine.

For details on how to connect the telephone or the answering machine to the machine:

Basic Connection

Setting the Receive Mode

This section describes the procedure to select the receive mode.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

4. Use the button to select Receive mode set., then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select the receive mode, then press the OK button.
The confirmation screen asking whether to make advanced settings is displayed.

If you select Yes and press the OK button, you can specify the advanced settings of each receive
mode.

Advanced Settings of Receive Mode

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

• For details on the receive mode:

682
 About the Receive Mode

• DRPD is available only in the US and Canada.

• Network switch may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.

• Refer to Receiving Faxes for information on receiving faxes or the procedure for each receive
mode.

About the Receive Mode

You can select the receive mode suitable for your fax use conditions: whether you use a dedicated line for
fax, etc.

Receive Your fax use condition Receiving operation

mode

TEL priority When mainly receiving voice When a call incomes, the telephone will ring.
mode calls (with a telephone or Pick up the handset.
answering machine
If the call is a voice call, talk on the telephone.
connected to the machine):
If the call is a fax, hang up the handset after the machine starts
receiving the fax.

Note
• The telephone may not ring when a call incomes even if it is
connected to the machine, depending on the type or settings of
the telephone.

DRPD or When receiving voice calls When a call incomes, the telephone will ring. The machine detects a
Network (with a telephone or fax call by the fax ring pattern.
switch answering machine If the call is a fax, the machine will receive the fax automatically.
connected to the machine)
If the machine does not detect the fax ring pattern, the telephone will
and subscribing to a ring
continue ringing.
pattern detection service
provided by your telephone Note
company:
• The telephone may not ring when a call incomes even if it is
connected to the machine, depending on the type or settings of
the telephone.

Fax only When not receiving voice When a fax incomes, the machine will receive the fax automatically.
mode calls:

Advanced Settings of Receive Mode

You can specify the advanced settings of each receive mode.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

• Advanced setting in TEL priority mode

You can specify the following setting items.

◦ Manual/auto switch

683
 If you select ON, the machine automatically receives faxes after the external device rang a
specified length of time.

You can specify the length of time until automatic reception is started.

◦ User-friendly RX

If you select ON, the machine automatically switches from telephone calling to fax reception by
detecting the fax signal (CNG signal) when you lift the handset of the telephone or the answering
machine answers. When you have an answering machine connected to the machine, select ON to
switch to fax reception automatically after the answering machine answers.

If you select OFF, the machine does not switch from telephone calling to fax reception
automatically even if the machine detects the fax signal (CNG signal). Select OFF if you want the
machine not to switch automatically during a call.

Note
• If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, the number of times the external device
rings specified with Incoming ring in Fax only mode is available in TEL priority mode.

If you want to specify the number of times the external device rings in TEL priority mode, select
Fax only mode for Receive mode set. under FAX menu, specify the number of times the
external device rings with Incoming ring, then switch to TEL priority mode for Receive mode
set..

• If you subscribe to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, we recommend that Manual/auto
switch be set to OFF.

• Advanced setting in Fax only mode

You can specify the following setting item.

◦ Incoming ring

You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.

• Advanced setting in DRPD

You can specify the following setting items.

◦ DRPD: FAX ring pat.

Sets the distinctive ring pattern of a call that the machine assumes is a fax call.

If you subscribe to a DRPD service, set the ring pattern to match the pattern assigned by your
telephone company.

Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)

◦ Incoming ring

You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.

• Advanced setting in Network switch

You can specify the following setting item.

◦ Incoming ring

You can specify the number of times the external device rings when incoming.

684
Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone
company, your telephone company will assign two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring
patterns to your single telephone line, allowing you to have different numbers for fax calls and voice calls
using only one telephone line. Your machine will automatically monitor the ring pattern, and will
automatically receive the fax if the ring pattern is a fax call.

To use DRPD, follow the procedure below to set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by
your telephone company.

Note
• Contact your local telephone company for detailed information on this service.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

4. Use the button to select Receive mode set., then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select DRPD, then press the OK button.

The confirmation screen asking whether to make advanced settings is displayed.

6. Use the button to select Yes, then press the OK button.

7. Use the button to select DRPD: FAX ring pat., then press the OK button.
The DRPD: FAX ring pat. screen is displayed.

8. Use the button to select the ring pattern that your telephone company assigned to
your fax number, then press the OK button.

Select from Normal ring, Double ring, Short-short-long, or Short-long-short.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

9. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.

685
Setting the Sender Information
You can set the sender information such as date/time, unit name, and unit fax/telephone number.
About the Sender Information

Setting the Date and Time

Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)

Registering User Information

About the Sender Information

If the unit name and unit fax/telephone number are registered, they are printed with date and time as
sender information on the recipient's fax.

A. Date and time of transmission

B. Unit fax/telephone number

C. Unit name

D. The registered recipient's name is printed when sending faxes.

E. Page number

Note
• You can print USER'S DATA LIST to confirm the sender information you have registered.
Summary of Reports and Lists
• When sending faxes in black & white, you can select whether to print the sender information inside or
outside the image area.

Specify the setting on TTI position in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.

Adv. FAX settings

• You can select the date print format from three formats: YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, and DD/MM/
YYYY.

Select the date print format on Date display format under Dev. user settings.

Dev. user settings

Setting the Date and Time

This section describes the procedure to set the date and time.

686
 1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Dev. user settings, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Date/time setting, then press the OK button.

6. Set the date and time.

Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, then use the Numeric buttons to
enter the date and time.

Enter the date and time in 24-hour format.

Enter only the last two digits of the year.

7. Press the OK button.

8. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.

Setting Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)

Some countries adopt the daylight saving time (summer time) system that shifts the clock time forward at
certain periods of the year.

You can set your machine to automatically change the time by registering the date and time that daylight
saving time (summer time) begins and ends.

Important
• Not all the latest information of all countries or regions is applied for DST setting by default. You
need to change the default setting according to the latest information of your country or region.

Note
• This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Device settings, then press the OK button.

687
4. Use the button to select Dev. user settings, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select DST setting, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select ON, then press the OK button.

To disable summer time, select OFF.

7. Set the date and time when summer time starts.

1. Use the button to select Start date/time, then press the OK button.
2. Make sure that Set month is selected, then press the OK button.
3. Use the button to select the month when summer time starts, then press the OK button.

4. Make sure that Set week is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the week when summer time starts, then press the OK button.
6. Make sure that Set day of week is selected, then press the OK button.
7. Use the button to select the day of the week when summer time starts, then press the OK
button.

8. Make sure that Set shift time is selected, then press the OK button.

9. Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to
enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time starts, then press the OK button.

Precede single digits with a zero.

8. Set the date and time when summer time ends.

1. Use the button to select End date/time, then press the OK button.

2. Make sure that Set month is selected, then press the OK button.

3. Use the button to select the month when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that Set week is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Use the button to select the week when summer time ends, then press the OK button.
6. Make sure that Set day of week is selected, then press the OK button.

7. Use the button to select the day of the week when summer time ends, then press the OK
button.
8. Make sure that Set shift time is selected, then press the OK button.

9. Use the button to move the cursor under the desired position, use the Numeric buttons to
enter the time (in 24-hour format) when summer time ends, then press the OK button.

Precede single digits with a zero.

9. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.

688
Registering User Information
This section describes the procedure to register the user information.

Note
• Before sending a fax, be sure to enter your name and fax/telephone number in Unit TEL no. registr.
and Unit name registr. on the FAX user settings screen (for US only).

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select FAX user settings, then press the OK button.

5. Enter the unit fax/telephone number.

1. Make sure that Unit TEL no. registr. is selected, then press the OK button.

2. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the unit fax/telephone number.

3. Press the OK button.

Note
• You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 20 digits, including spaces.

• For details on how to enter or delete characters:

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

6. Enter the unit name.

1. Make sure that Unit name registr. is selected, then press the OK button.
2. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the unit name.

3. Press the OK button.

Note
• You can enter the name up to 24 characters, including spaces.

• For details on how to enter or delete characters:

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

7. Press the FAX button to return to the Fax standby screen.

689
Sending Faxes Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number Basic
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number)
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions

690
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number
This section describes dialing and sending faxes directly by entering the fax/telephone numbers.

Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF.

Important
• When sending a double-sided document, load the document on the platen glass. Double-sided
documents cannot be automatically scanned and sent from the ADF.

Note
• For details on the types, conditions of document, and how to load the document:

Loading Originals

4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.

Setting Items for Sending Faxes

5. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.

Use the following buttons to dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.

Numeric buttons:
Enters the number.

button:
Enters a space.

button:
Deletes the last character you entered.

button:
By pressing this button once, "#" is entered. By pressing this button one more time, "P" is entered.

691
6. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.
The machine starts scanning the document.

Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.
• Do not open the document cover until scanning is completed.

7. Start sending.

• If you load the document in the ADF:

The machine scans the document automatically and starts sending the fax.

Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.

• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress,
Close the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the
OK button, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.

• If you load the document on the platen glass:

After scanning the document, the confirmation screen asking you if you load the next document is
displayed.

To send the scanned document, press the OK button to start sending it.

Note
• To send two or more pages, follow the message to load the next page, and press the Color or
Black button. After scanning all pages, press the OK button to start sending.

• To cancel sending the fax, press the Stop button.

Note
• When your machine is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) system, refer to the operating
instructions of the system for details on dialing the recipient's fax/telephone number.

• In case the machine was not able to send a fax, such as when the recipient's line was busy, it has the
function to automatically redial the number after a specified interval. Automatic redialing is enabled by
default.

Automatic Redialing

• Unsent documents, such as those pending redial, are stored in the machine's memory. They are not
stored in the case of a sending error.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

• Do not unplug the power cord until all documents are sent. If you unplug the power cord, all unsent
documents stored in the machine's memory are lost.

692
Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number)
There are two methods of redialing: Automatic redialing and Manual redialing.

• Automatic Redialing
If you send a document and the recipient's line is busy, the machine will redial the number after a
specified interval.

Automatic Redialing

• Manual Redialing

You can redial to the recipients dialed using the Numeric buttons.

Manual Redialing

Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.

Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone

Note
• Automatic redialing is enabled by default.

• For details on the basic sending operations:

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

Automatic Redialing
You can enable or disable automatic redialing. If you enable automatic redialing, you can specify the
maximum number of redial attempts and the length of time the machine waits between redial attempts.

Enable and specify the automatic redialing setting on Auto redial in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.
Adv. FAX settings

Important
• While automatic redialing, the unsent fax is stored in the machine's memory temporarily until the
sending fax is complete. If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord before automatic
redialing is complete, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted and not sent.

Note
• To cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts redialing, then press the Stop button.

• To cancel automatic redialing, delete the unsent fax from the machine's memory while the machine is
on-standby for a redial operation. For details, see Deleting a Document in Machine's Memory.

Manual Redialing
Follow the procedure below for manual redialing.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

693
2. Press the FAX button.
The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF.

4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.

Setting Items for Sending Faxes

5. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

6. Use the button to select Redial, then press the OK button.

The Redial screen is displayed.

7. Use the button to select the recipient's number to redial, then press the OK button.

8. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.

Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.

Note
• For manual redialing, the machine memorizes up to 10 recent recipients dialed by entering the fax/
telephone numbers. Note that the machine does not memorize any recipients dialed using the redial
function or selecting from the directory.

• To cancel manual redialing, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.

• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.

694
Setting Items for Sending Faxes
If you select FAX TX settings after pressing the Menu button on the Fax standby screen, you can specify
the settings of the scan contrast and the scan resolution.

Adjust the scan contrast and resolution following the procedure below.

1. Press the Menu button on the Fax standby screen.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

2. Use the button to select FAX TX settings, then press the OK button.

3. Use the button to select Scan contrast, then press the OK button.
The Scan contrast screen is displayed.

4. Use the button to select the scan contrast, then press the OK button.

The button decreases the scan contrast, and the button increases the scan contrast.

By pressing the OK button, the LCD returns to the FAX TX settings screen.

5. Use the button to select Scan resolution, then press the OK button.
The Scan resolution screen is displayed.

6. Use the button to select the scan resolution.

The following settings are selectable on Scan resolution.

Standard
Suitable for text-only documents.
Fine
Suitable for fine-print documents.

Extra fine
Suitable for detailed illustration or fine-print quality documents.

If the recipient's fax machine is not compatible with Extra fine (300 x 300 dpi), the fax will be sent in
the Standard or Fine resolution.

Photo
Suitable for photographs.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

695
 • When sending a color fax, documents are always scanned in the same resolution (200 x 200 dpi).
The image quality (compression rate) is determined by which scan resolution is selected, except
that Extra fine and Photo provide the same image quality.

7. Press the OK button.

The LCD returns to the Fax standby screen.

696
Sending Faxes Using Useful Functions
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential Broadcasting)
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes
Using the On Hook Dial Function

697
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone
If you want to speak to the recipient before sending a fax, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine
that can receive faxes automatically, send a fax manually after speaking to the recipient on the telephone to
check whether the recipient can receive faxes.

Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone. See below for the procedure to send a fax manually.

• With manual transmission, you cannot use the platen glass to load documents. Load the documents in
the ADF.

When loading document on the platen glass, send a fax with automatic transmission.
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

• To speak to the recipient before sending a fax, you need to connect a telephone to the machine.

For details on how to connect the telephone to the machine:

Basic Connection

Note
• For details on the basic sending operations:

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Load documents in the ADF.

4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.

Setting Items for Sending Faxes

5. Lift the handset of the telephone connected to the machine.

6. Use the telephone to dial the recipient's fax/telephone number.

7. Speak to the recipient.

When you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipient's voice, you cannot check whether the
recipient can receive faxes. If you want to stop sending the fax, replace the handset. If you want to send
the fax, go to step 9.

8. Ask the recipient to set the recipient's fax machine to receive faxes.

9. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press the Color button or the Black button.

698
 Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission.

Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.

10. Hang up the handset.

Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.

• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress,
Close the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK
button, the remaining documents are automatically ejected.

699
Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient
Registering recipient's fax/telephone number and name in the machine's directory enables you to send
faxes easily.

Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone

Note
• For details on the basic sending operations:
Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF.

4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.

Setting Items for Sending Faxes

5. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

6. Use the button to select Directory, then press the OK button.

The screen to select a registered recipient is displayed.

7. Select a registered recipient.

You can choose a recipient with the two methods. The method can be switched by pressing the
button.
• When the following screen is displayed on the LCD:

Use the button to select a recipient, then press the OK button.

• When Enter first letter is displayed on the LCD:

700
 After you use the Numeric buttons to enter the first letter of the recipient's name you want to
search, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order.

Use the button to select a recipient, then press the OK button.

8. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.

Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.

Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.

• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
• In case the machine was not able to send a fax, such as when the recipient's line was busy, it has the
function to automatically redial the number after a specified interval. Automatic redialing is enabled by
default.

Automatic Redialing

To cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts redialing, then press the Stop button.

701
Sending the Same Document to Several Recipients (Sequential
Broadcasting)
This machine allows you to prepare for sending the same document to a maximum of 21 recipients in one
operation. The recipients can be specified by entering the fax/telephone numbers and selecting the
registered recipients (the particular recipient's number and the group dial) in combination.

The following number of recipients can be specified in combination.

• The recipient registered to the machine:

Up to 20 (total of the particular recipient's number and the group dial)

• Entering the fax/telephone numbers or redialing:

Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them one by one after speaking on the telephone.

Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone

Note
• If you frequently send documents to the same group of recipients, you can group these numbers for
group dialing. This will allow you to send documents to all the recipients in the group by simply
operation.

Registering Recipients in Group Dial

• For details on the basic sending operations:

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Load documents on the platen glass or in the ADF.

4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.

Setting Items for Sending Faxes

5. Specify the first recipient.

Specify the first recipient with the one of the following methods.
• By specifying with the recipient registered to the machine:

Press the Menu button, use the button to select Directory, then press the OK button. Next,
use the button to select a recipient, then press the OK button.

Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient

702
 • By entering the fax/telephone numbers:

Use the Numeric buttons to enter the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

Note
• If FAX no. re-entry in Security control under Fax settings is set to ON, use the Numeric
buttons again to enter the number, then press the OK button.
Security control

• By redialing:
Press the Menu button, use the button to select Redial, then press the OK button. Next, use
the button to select the number you want to dial, then press the OK button.
Manual Redialing

6. Add the recipient.

If you have already specified the recipient by entering the fax/telephone numbers or if you have already
specified the recipient from the outgoing call logs, specify a recipient from the registered recipients.

Broadcasting is displayed after specifying the multiple recipients.

If you want to add the recipient further, repeat the same procedure.

Note
• When Broadcasting is displayed, you can review the numbers you have entered by pressing the
button.
• Pressing the Back button allows you to delete the recipient's number you entered last.

7. Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white
transmission.

Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.

Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.
• When you press the Stop button, fax transmission to all the recipients specified will be canceled. You
cannot cancel a fax transmission to only one recipient.

703
Preventing Mistransmission of Faxes
This machine has two functions for preventing the mistransmission of faxes.

• Sending faxes after entering the fax/telephone number twice

This function requires you to re-enter the fax/telephone number after entering the number using the
Numeric buttons, so that the machine prevents you from misdialing.

Sending Faxes after Dialing Twice (Fax Number Re-entry)

• Sending faxes after the machine checks the recipient's fax machine information

Before sending a fax, the machine checks whether the recipient's fax machine information matches the
dialed number.

Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the Recipient's Information)

Sending Faxes after Dialing Twice (Fax Number Re-entry)

Set FAX no. re-entry to ON following the procedure below.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select FAX no. re-entry, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select ON, then press the OK button.

Note
• If the number is not identical with the number entered first, the Fax standby screen is displayed.

Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the Recipient's

Information)
Set Check RX FAX info to ON following the procedure below.

Important
• This function is not available when you send a fax manually.

Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

704
2. Press the Setup button.
The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Check RX FAX info, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select ON, then press the OK button.

Important
• Transmission will be canceled if the machine fails to receive the recipient's fax information or if
the received information does not match the fax/telephone number.

705
Using the On Hook Dial Function
Follow the procedure below to send faxes with the on hook dial function.

Important
• It may be possible that faxes will reach unintended recipients due to the misdialing or incorrect
registration of fax/telephone numbers. When you send important documents, we recommend that you
send them after speaking on the telephone.
Sending a Fax after Speaking on Telephone

• With manual transmission, you cannot use the platen glass to load documents. Load the documents in
the ADF.

When loading document on the platen glass, send a fax with automatic transmission.

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

Note
• You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook setting in Security control under Fax settings
is set to Enable.

Security control
• For details on the basic sending operations:

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Load documents in the ADF.

4. Adjust the scan contrast and resolution as necessary.

Setting Items for Sending Faxes

5. Press the Color button or the Black button.

6. Specify the recipient.

Specify the recipient with the one of the following methods.
• By specifying with the recipient registered to the machine:

Press the Menu button, use the button to select Directory, then press the OK button. Next,
use the button to select a recipient, then press the OK button.

Sending a Fax to the Registered Recipient

• By entering the fax/telephone numbers:

Use the Numeric buttons to enter the recipient's fax/telephone number.

Sending Faxes by Entering Fax/Telephone Number

706
 • Manual redialing:

Press the Menu button, use the button to select Redial, then press the OK button. Next, use
the button to select the number you want to dial, then press the OK button.

Manual Redialing

7. When you hear a high-pitched signal, press the Color button or the Black button.
Press the Color button for color transmission, or the Black button for black & white transmission.

Important
• Color transmission is available only when the recipient's fax machine supports color faxing.

Note
• To cancel a fax transmission, press the Stop button. To cancel a fax transmission while it is in
progress, press the Stop button, then follow the instructions on the LCD.

• If documents remain in the ADF after the Stop button is pressed while scanning is in progress, Close
the feeder cover [OK]Eject the document is displayed on the LCD. By pressing the OK button, the
remaining documents are automatically ejected.

707
Registering Recipients
Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility

708
Registering Recipients Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Registering recipients in the machine's directory in advance allows you to dial fax/telephone numbers
simply.

The following methods to register are available:

• Recipient registration

Registering the recipient's fax/telephone number and name allows you to send a fax by selecting a
registered recipient in the machine directory.

Registering the Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients

• Group dial registration

You can combine two or more recipients registered in advance into a group. You can send the same
document to all the registered recipients in the group.

Registering Recipients in Group Dial

You can register up to 100 recipients in total of individual recipients and group dials.

Note
• To change the registered information of the recipient or the group dial, see Changing Registered
Information.
• To delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial, see Deleting Registered
Information.
• To print a list of the recipient's fax/telephone numbers and names registered, see Printing a List of the
Registered Destinations.
• You can register, change, or delete the registered information of the recipient or the group dial using
Speed Dial Utility on the computer.

Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility

709
Registering the Fax/Telephone Number of Recipients
Before you can use the machine's directory, you need to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers.
Follow the procedure below to register the recipients' fax/telephone numbers.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select Recipient, then press the OK button.

The screen to select an ID number is displayed.

7. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an unregistered ID number, then press
the OK button.

Note
• If you already registered the recipient, the fax/telephone number is displayed next to the ID
number. If you already registered the group dial, (Not available) is displayed.

8. Use the button to select a registration method, then press the OK button.

9. Register the recipients' fax/telephone number.

Register the recipients' fax/telephone number depending on the registration method selected.
• From call log (OUT)

When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number from the
outgoing call logs is displayed.

1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.

The fax/telephone number selected from the outgoing call logs is displayed.
2. Check the fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.

The fax/telephone number is registered to the machine and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.
• From call log (IN)

710
 When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number or the
name from the incoming call logs is displayed.

1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name, then press the OK button.

The fax/telephone number selected from the incoming call logs is displayed.
2. Check the fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.

The fax/telephone number is registered to the machine and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.

Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.

• Direct entry
When you select this registration method, the screen to enter the fax/telephone number is
displayed.

1. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number you want to register.

2. Press the OK button.

The fax/telephone number is registered to the machine and the screen to enter the recipient's
name is displayed. Go to next step.

Note
• You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 60 digits (40 digits for the US, Canada,
Korea and some regions of Latin America), including spaces.

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

• Press the button twice to enter a pause.

• When Telephone line type in FAX user settings under Fax settings is set to Rotary
pulse, you can enter a tone ("T") by pressing the Tone button.

10. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the recipient's name.

If you select a name on From call log (IN) in step 8, the name may be already entered. If you do not
change the name, go to step 10.

Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

711
11. Press the OK button to finalize registration.

Note
• To register another recipient's number and name, select an unregistered ID number and operate
in the same procedure.

• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.

• You can check the recipient's numbers and names you have registered by printing RECIPIENT
TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST.

Printing a List of the Registered Destinations

712
Registering Recipients in Group Dial
If you register two or more registered recipients to a group dial, you can send the same document
successively to all recipients registered to the group dial.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select Group dial, then press the OK button.
The screen to select an ID number is displayed.

7. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an unregistered ID number, then press
the OK button.

Note
• If you already registered the recipient, (Not available) is displayed next to the ID number. If you
already registered the group dial, the registered group name is displayed.

The Group member screen is displayed.

8. Register the registered recipient as a member of the group dial.

1. Press the Menu button.

2. Choose a recipient to register as a member.

You can choose a recipient with the two methods. The method can be switched by pressing the
button.
• When Add to group is displayed on the LCD:

Use the button to select a recipient's ID number to register to the group dial.
• When Enter first letter is displayed on the LCD:

713
 After you use the Numeric buttons to enter the first letter of the recipient's name you want to
search, the registered recipients are displayed in alphabetical order.

Use the button to select a recipient's ID number to register to the group dial.
3. Press the OK button.
The selected recipient is registered as a member of the group dial.

4. Press the Menu button to display the screen to select an ID number, then add another member.
Repeat this step to register the other recipient to the same group dial.

Note
• You can check the recipient's ID number and name registered to the group dial by using the
button.

9. Press the OK button after finishing registering the member you want to register to the group
dial.
The screen to enter the group name is displayed.

10. Use the Numeric buttons to enter the group name.

Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

11. Press the OK button to finalize registration.

Note
• To register another group, select an unregistered ID number and operate in the same procedure.

• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.

• You can check the recipients you have registered to the group dial by printing GROUP DIAL
TELEPHONE NO. LIST.

Printing a List of the Registered Destinations

714
Changing Registered Information
To change information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.

6. Change the registered information.

• To change the recipient's information:

1. Use the button to select Recipient, then press the OK button.

2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select a recipient's ID number, then press the
OK button.

3. Use the button to select Edit, then press the OK button.

The screen to select a registration method is displayed as well as when you register the
recipient.

4. Use the button to select a registration method, then press the OK button.

5. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.

◦ From call log (OUT) is selected as the registration method:

The screen to select the fax/telephone number from the outgoing call logs is displayed.
After you use the button to select a fax/telephone number and press the OK button,
the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press
the OK button.
◦ From call log (IN) is selected as the registration method:

The screen to select the fax/telephone number or the name from the incoming call logs is
displayed. After you use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name and
press the OK button, the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone
number, then press the OK button.

Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of
purchase.

◦ Direct entry is selected as the registration method:

the editing screen is displayed. Change the recipient's fax/telephone number, then press
the OK button.

After editing the recipient's fax/telephone number is complete, the screen to edit the recipient's
name is displayed.

715
 Note
• You can enter the fax/telephone number up to 60 digits (40 digits for the US, Canada,
Korea and some regions of Latin America), including spaces.

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

• Press the button twice to enter a pause.

• When Telephone line type in FAX user settings under Fax settings is set to Rotary
pulse, you can enter a tone ("T") by pressing the Tone button.

6. Change the recipient's name, then press the OK button.

Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.
Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

• To change a group dial:

1. Use the button to select Group dial, then press the OK button.

2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to change,
then press the OK button.

3. Use the button to select Edit, then press the OK button.

4. Edit the member of the group dial.

To add a member, press the Menu button to display the screen to select an ID number and
then add another member.

To delete a member, select a member to delete and then press the Tone button.
5. Change the group name, then press the OK button.

Note
• You can enter the name up to 16 characters, including spaces.

Entering Numbers, Letters, and Symbols

Note
• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.

716
Deleting Registered Information
To delete information registered for recipient and group dial, follow the procedure below.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select TEL no. registration, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Add directory entry, then press the OK button.

6. Delete the registered information.

• To delete the recipient's information:

1. Use the button to select Recipient, then press the OK button.

2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to delete,
then press the OK button.

3. Use the button to select Delete, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Yes, then press the OK button.

• To delete a group dial:

1. Use the button to select Group dial, then press the OK button.

2. Use the button or the Numeric buttons to select an ID number of group dial to delete,
then press the OK button.

3. Use the button to select Delete, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Yes, then press the OK button.

Note
• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.

717
Printing a List of the Registered Destinations
You can print a list of the fax/telephone numbers and can keep it near the machine to refer to when dialing.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Load paper.

3. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

4. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

5. Use the button to select Print reports/lists, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select Directory list, then press the OK button.

7. Use the button to select an item to print, then press the OK button.
• If you selected Recipient:

Use the button to select whether to print the list in alphabetical order, then press the OK
button.

If you select Yes, RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST is printed in alphabetical order.

If you select No, RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST is printed in the order of the ID
number.

• If you selected Group dial:

GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST is printed.

718
Registering Recipients Using Speed Dial Utility

About Speed Dial Utility

Speed Dial Utility is a utility for forwarding the fax/telephone numbers registered on the machine to a
computer and registering/changing them on the computer. In addition, you can register the fax/telephone
number, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, and rejected numbers edited on the computer to the
machine. You can also save them on the computer as a backup.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that you backup the registered data on the computer using Speed
Dial Utility.

Starting Up Speed Dial Utility

Speed Dial Utility Dialog box

Saving Registered Information on the Machine to Your Computer

Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility

Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility

Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility

Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility

Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility

Calling the Registered Information Up from Your Computer and Registering the Information to the
Machine

Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility

719
Starting Up Speed Dial Utility
Before starting up Speed Dial Utility, confirm the following:

• The necessary application software (MP Drivers and Speed Dial Utility) is installed.

If MP Drivers or Speed Dial Utility is not yet installed, install them with the Setup CD-ROM or install
them from our website.

• The machine is connected to a computer correctly.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.

Do not plug in or unplug any cables while the machine is in operation, or when the computer is in sleep
or standby mode.

If your machine is compatible with LAN connection, make sure that the machine is connected to the
computer with LAN connection to use Speed Dial Utility via LAN connection.

Follow the procedure below to start up Speed Dial Utility.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Speed Dial Utility on the Start screen to start Speed Dial
Utility. If Speed Dial Utility is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then
search for "Speed Dial Utility".

• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon
Utilities, Speed Dial Utility, and then Speed Dial Utility.

Note
• You can also start up Speed Dial Utility from Quick Menu or Quick Toolbox.

720
Speed Dial Utility Dialog box
The following items are on the Speed Dial Utility dialog box.

1. Printer Name:
Selects the machine for editing the registered information using Speed Dial Utility.

2. Display Printer Settings

Loads the registered information on the machine selected for Printer Name: into Speed Dial Utility.

3. Setting Item List:

Selects the registered information for editing. Choose one item from TEL Number Registration, User
Information Setting, and Rejected Number Setting.

4. Registered information list

Displays the registered information selected for Setting Item List:.

5. Edit.../Select All/Delete
Edits/deletes the registered information or selects all the registered information selected for Setting Item
List:.

When multiple items on the registered information list are selected, you cannot use the Edit... button.

6. Load from PC...

Displays the registered information saved on the computer.

721
 7. Instructions
Displays this guide.

8. Exit
Quits Speed Dial Utility. Information registered or edited using Speed Dial Utility is neither saved on the
computer nor registered on the machine.

9. Save to PC...
Saves information edited using Speed Dial Utility on the computer.

10. Register to Printer

Registers information edited using Speed Dial Utility to the machine.

722
Saving Registered Information on the Machine to Your Computer
Follow the procedure below to save the recipients' name, recipients' fax/telephone number, group dial,
user's name, user's fax/telephone number, or rejected numbers that registered on the machine to the
computer.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click Save to PC....

4. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.

723
Registering a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to register fax/telephone numbers.

Note
• Before you register fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:.

The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed.

4. Select an unoccupied code from the list, then click Edit....

The Individual or Group Selection dialog box is displayed.

5. Click Register individual TEL number or Register group dial, then click Next....
• If Register individual TEL number is selected:

1. Enter the name.

2. Enter the fax/telephone number.

• If Register group dial is selected:

724
 1. Enter the group name.

2. Select the code you want to add to the group dial, then click Add >>.

Note
• You can only enter numbers that have already been registered.

6. Click OK.
To continue registering fax/telephone numbers or a group dial, repeat steps 4 to 6.

• To save the registered information on the computer.

1. Click Save to PC....

2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
• To register the registered information to the machine:
1. Click Register to Printer.
2. Confirm the message on the display, then click OK.
The information is registered to the machine.

725
Changing a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to change fax/telephone numbers.

Note
• Before you change fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations
are in progress.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:.

The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed.

4. Select a code to change from the list, then click Edit....

• If an individual fax/telephone number is selected:

1. Enter the new name.

2. Enter the new fax/telephone number.

• If a group dial is selected:

1. Enter the new group name.

2. Add or delete a member to/from the group dial.

726
 To add a member:
Select the code to add to the group dial, then click Add >>.

To delete a member:
Select the code to delete from the group dial, then click << Delete.

5. Click OK.
To continue changing fax/telephone numbers or group dials, repeat steps 4 and 5.

• To save the edited information on the computer.

1. Click Save to PC....
2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
• To register the edited information to the machine:
1. Click Register to Printer.
2. Confirm the message on the display, then click OK.
The information is registered to the machine.

727
Deleting a Fax/telephone Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to delete fax/telephone numbers.

Note
• Before you delete fax/telephone numbers using Speed Dial Utility, make sure that no fax operations are
in progress.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click TEL Number Registration from Setting Item List:.

The list of registered fax/telephone numbers is displayed.

4. Select a code to delete from the list, then click Delete.

The selected fax/telephone number is deleted.

To continue deleting fax/telephone numbers, repeat step 4.

Note
• To delete all fax/telephone numbers on the list, click Select All, then Delete.

• To save the edited information on the computer.

1. Click Save to PC....

2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.
• To register the edited information to the machine:

1. Click Register to Printer.

2. Confirm the message on the display, then click OK.

The information is registered to the machine.

728
Changing Sender Information Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to change the user's name or fax/telephone number.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click User Information Setting from Setting Item List:.

The user's information is displayed.

4. Select an item to change, then click Edit....

The User Information dialog box is displayed.

5. Enter the new user's name on User Name and new fax/telephone number in TEL Number,
then click OK.
• To save the edited information on the computer:

1. Click Save to PC....

2. Enter the file name on the displayed screen, then click Save.

• To register the edited information to the machine:

1. Click Register to Printer.

2. Confirm the message on the display, then click OK.

The information is registered to the machine.

729
Registering/Changing Rejected Number Using Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to register, change, or delete rejected numbers.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click Rejected Number Setting from Setting Item List:.

The list of rejected numbers is displayed.

• To register a rejected number:

1. Select an unoccupied code from the list, then click Edit....
2. Enter the fax/telephone number in the Rejected Number dialog box, then click OK.
• To change a rejected number:
1. Select a code to change from the list, then click Edit....
2. Enter the fax/telephone number in the Rejected Number dialog box, then click OK.

• To delete a rejected number:

1. Select a code to delete from the list, then click Delete.

The selected fax/telephone number is deleted.

Note
• To delete all fax/telephone numbers on the list, click Select All, then Delete.

730
Calling the Registered Information Up from Your Computer and
Registering the Information to the Machine
You can register the fax/telephone numbers, user's name, user's fax/telephone number, and rejected
numbers saved on the computer to the machine.

1. Start up Speed Dial Utility.

2. Select the machine from the Printer Name: list box, then click Display Printer Settings.

3. Click Load from PC....

4. Select the RSD file (*.rsd) to register to the machine.

5. Click Open on the dialog box.

6. Click Register to Printer.

The registered information on the computer is registered to the machine.

731
Uninstalling Speed Dial Utility
Follow the procedure below to uninstall Speed Dial Utility.

Important
• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.

1. Perform the uninstalling process.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8:

1. Select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Programs > Programs and
Features.

2. Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list, then click Uninstall.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.
2. Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list, then click Uninstall.

If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• In Windows XP:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

2. Select Canon Speed Dial Utility from the program list, then click Remove.

2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.

When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click OK to restart your
computer.

Note
• To reinstall Speed Dial Utility, uninstall Speed Dial Utility, then install it again from our website.

732
Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes
Changing the Paper Settings
Memory Reception
Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions

733
Receiving Faxes
This section describes the preparation necessary for receiving a fax and how to receive a fax.

Preparing for Receiving a Fax

Prepare for receiving a fax according to the following procedure.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Make sure of the receive mode setting.

Make sure of the receive mode setting displayed on the Fax standby screen.

Note
• For details on how to change the receive mode:

Setting the Receive Mode

4. Load paper.
Load the sheets of plain paper.

5. Specify the paper settings as necessary.

Changing the Paper Settings

This completes the preparation for receiving fax.

When a fax is received, it is printed on the loaded paper automatically.

Receiving a Fax
Depending on the selected receive mode, the receive operation varies.

Note
• For details on the receive mode:

Setting the Receive Mode

• You can specify the advanced settings of each receive mode.

For details on the advanced settings of the receive mode:

Advanced Settings of Receive Mode

• If the machine was not able to print a received fax, the machine stores the unprinted fax temporarily
in its memory (memory receiving).

Memory Reception

734
When TEL priority mode is selected:

• When the call is a fax:

The telephone will ring when a call incomes.

Pick up the handset. If you hear the fax tone, wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops, then hang up
the handset.

The machine will receive the fax.

Note
• If the machine will not switch to fax reception, press the FAX button, then the Color or Black
button to receive the fax.

• To receive a fax without picking up the handset, set Manual/auto switch of the advanced
setting to ON. RX start time allows you to specify the number of seconds until the machine
switches to fax reception.

• If you have subscribed to Duplex Ringing service in Hong Kong, the telephone will ring a
specified number of times when there is an incoming call with a fax distinctive ring pattern.
Then, the machine will switch to fax reception automatically without the handset being picked
up.

The number of times to ring the telephone until switching to fax reception can be changed.
• Set the machine to enable you to initiate fax reception from a connected telephone (remote
reception).

Remote Reception
• When the answering machine is connected to the machine:

• If the answering machine is set to the answering mode, set User-friendly RX of the
advanced setting to ON. If the call is a fax, the machine will receive the fax automatically.
• If the answering mode is turned off on the answering machine, pick up the handset. If you
hear the fax tone, wait for at least 5 seconds after it stops, then hang up the handset.
• If Manual/auto switch of the advanced setting is set to ON, set RX start time to longer
than the time before the answering machine starts playing the answering message. After
making this setting, we recommend that you call the answering machine using a mobile
phone, etc. to confirm that messages are recorded successfully in the answering machine.
• Set your answering machine to answering mode and adjust it as follows:

735
 - The entire message should be no longer than 15 seconds.

- In the message, tell your callers how to send a fax.

• When the call is a voice call:

The telephone will ring when a call incomes.

Pick up the handset, and talk on the telephone.

Note
• If the machine unexpectedly switches to fax reception during telephone calls, set User-friendly
RX of the advanced setting to OFF.

• If Manual/auto switch of the advanced setting is set to ON, you must answer an incoming call
by picking up the handset within the time specified in RX start time. Otherwise the machine
will switch to fax reception.

When Fax only mode is selected:

• When the call is a fax:

The machine will receive the fax automatically.

Note
• If a telephone is connected to the machine, the telephone will ring when a call incomes.

• You can change the number of times to ring the telephone with Incoming ring of the advanced
setting.

When DRPD or Network switch is selected:

• When the call is a fax:

The telephone will ring when a call incomes.

736
 The machine will receive the fax automatically when the fax ring pattern is detected.

Note
• You can change the number of times to ring the telephone.

Advanced Settings of Receive Mode

• When the call is a voice call:

The telephone will ring when a call incomes.

When the machine does not detect the fax ring pattern, the telephone will continue ringing.

Pick up the handset, and talk on the telephone.

Note
• To use this feature, you need to subscribe to a compatible service provided by your telephone
company.

• For DRPD

You need to select the appropriate ring pattern on the machine.

Setting the DRPD Ring Pattern (US and Canada only)

• For Network switch

The name of this service varies depending on the country or region of purchase. This setting
may not be also available depending on the country or region of purchase.

737
Changing the Paper Settings
This machine prints received faxes to paper loaded in the machine beforehand. You can use the operation
panel to change the paper settings for printing faxes. Make sure that the settings are appropriate for the
loaded paper.

Important
• If the size of loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting, the received faxes
are stored in the machine's memory and Check page size and Press [OK] are displayed on the LCD.
In this case, load the same size of paper as that specified in the paper size setting, then press the OK
button.

You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the
machine's memory later.

Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

• If no paper is loaded, or paper has run out while printing is in progress, the received faxes are stored in
the machine's memory and the error message for no paper is displayed on the LCD. In this case, load
paper and press the OK button.

You can also press the Stop button to close the message and print the stored documents in the
machine's memory later.

Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

Note
• If the sender sends a document that is larger than Letter-size or Legal-size, such as 11 x 17 inches, the
sender's machine may send the fax automatically reduced in size or divided, or send only a part of the
original.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

4. Use the button to select FAX paper settings, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select a setting item, then press the OK button.

6. Specify the settings.

Use the button to adjust each setting item, then press the OK button. The next setting item is
displayed.

The LCD returns to the Fax standby screen when all the settings are complete or when pressing the
FAX button.

738
 Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

• Page size

Select the page size from A4, Letter, LTR, or Legal.

Note
• Some of page sizes are not available depending on the country or region of purchase.

• Media type
The paper type is set to Plain paper.

739
Memory Reception
If the machine was not able to print the received fax, the received fax is stored in the machine's memory.
The FAX Memory lamp is lit and Received in memory is displayed at the Fax standby screen.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted. The next time you
turn the machine on, press the OK button after a confirmation screen is displayed. The list of the faxes
deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.

If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, the received fax will be automatically
stored in the machine's memory.

• The machine is set to store received faxes in its memory:

When Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings,
the received faxes are stored in the machine's memory.

You can print the faxes stored in the machine's memory from the Memory reference screen under FAX
menu.

Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

Note
• To print the received faxes automatically, select Print for Received documents in Auto print
settings under Fax settings.

Auto print settings

• An error has occurred on the machine:

If you select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings, a received fax
will be printed automatically. However, if any of the following errors occurs, the received fax will not be
printed. It will instead be stored in the machine's memory.

When the error is resolved, the fax stored in the machine's memory is printed automatically.
◦ The amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print a fax:

Replace the FINE cartridge.

Replacing a FINE Cartridge

Note
• You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out.

Set Print when no ink in Auto print settings under Fax settings to Print.

However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.

Also, the contents of the fax will not be stored in the machine's memory.

If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received
documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings to store the received fax in the
machine's memory. After you replace the FINE cartridge and select Print for Received
documents in Auto print settings, the fax stored in the machine's memory will be printed
automatically.

Auto print settings

740
 ◦ Paper has run out:

◦ A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:

Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.

• You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a fax:

Press the FAX button to resume printing of the fax.

Note
• The machine can store up to max. 50 pages* (max. 20 documents) of faxes in the machine's memory.
* When using ITU-T No.1 chart (Standard mode)

• If the machine's memory becomes full during memory reception, only pages which already have been
received are stored in the memory. Print the received faxes stored in the machine's memory, delete
them from the machine's memory, and have the sender resend the faxes.
Document Stored in Machine's Memory

741
Receiving Faxes Using Useful Functions
Remote Reception
Rejecting Fax Reception
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls

742
Remote Reception
If the machine is located away from the telephone, pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the
machine and dial 25 (the remote reception ID) to receive faxes (remote reception).

• If you use a rotary pulse line, temporarily switch your telephone to tone dialing. For details on how to
switch to tone dialing, refer to your telephone's instruction manual.

• If you have an answering machine connected to the machine that can carry out remote control
operations, the security code for this function may be the same as the remote reception ID. In this case,
change the remote reception ID in Remote RX ID in Remote RX in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.

Adv. FAX settings

Remote reception can be disabled.

743
Rejecting Fax Reception
You can set the machine to reject faxes with no sender information or those from specific senders.

Select one of the following conditions to reject faxes.

• Faxes with no caller identification.

• Faxes from senders not registered in the machine's directory.

• Faxes from senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers.

Select a fax rejection condition following the procedure below.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select FAX RX reject, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select ON, then press the OK button.

7. Use the button to select the fax rejection condition, then press the OK button.
No sender info.
Rejects faxes with no caller identification.

Not in directory
Rejects faxes from the senders not registered in the machine's directory.

Rejected numbers
Rejects faxes from the senders registered in the machine as rejected numbers.

For details on how to register the rejected number, see Registering the Rejected Number.

Note
• The * (asterisk) on the LCD indicates the current setting.

• When the machine rejects reception, Reception rejected is displayed on The Fax standby screen.

• Faxes with no caller identification are also rejected when the setting other than No sender info. is
selected.

Registering the Rejected Number

Register the rejected number following the procedure below.

1. When the confirmation screen to register the rejected number is displayed, use the
button to select Yes, then press the OK button.

744
2. Use the button to select a registration number, then press the OK button.

3. Use the button to select a registration method, then press the OK button.
Register the rejected number depending on the registration method.
• From call log (OUT)

When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number from
the outgoing call logs is displayed.

1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number, then press the OK button.

2. Press the OK button again.

• From call log (IN)
When you select this registration method, the screen to select the fax/telephone number or the
name from the incoming call logs is displayed.

1. Use the button to select a fax/telephone number or a name, then press the OK button.

2. Press the OK button again.

Note
• This registration method may not be available depending on the country or region of
purchase.

• Direct entry

When you select this registration method, the screen to register the fax/telephone number is
displayed.

Use the Numeric buttons to enter the fax/telephone number you want to register, then press the
OK button.

Note
• To register another rejected number, use the button to select another registration number, then
register the rejected number.

You can register up to 10 rejected numbers.

• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the FAX button.

• You can print the list of rejected numbers (REJECTED NUMBER LIST).

Summary of Reports and Lists

• To change the registered rejected number, display the screen to register the fax/telephone number in
the same operation, change rejected number, then press the OK button.

• To delete the registered rejected number, display the screen to register the fax/telephone number in
the same operation, press the Back button repeatedly to delete the rejected number, then press the
OK button.

745
• You can register the rejected number in Rejected numbers in TEL no. registration under Fax
settings.

746
Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls
If you subscribe to the Caller ID service, the machine detects the sender's Caller ID. If the sender's ID
matches the condition specified in this setting, the machine rejects the phone call or fax reception from the
sender.

Note
• This setting may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase.
Contact your telephone company to confirm whether it provides this service.

Specify the setting following the procedure below.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the Setup button.

The Setup menu screen is displayed.

3. Use the button to select Fax settings, then press the OK button.

4. Use the button to select Security control, then press the OK button.

5. Use the button to select Caller rejection, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select Subscribed, then press the OK button.

You can now perform settings for Caller rejection.

7. Use the button to select whether to reject a phone call or fax reception from an
anonymous number, then press the OK button.

8. Use the button to select whether to reject a phone call or fax reception out of the
subscribed service area, then press the OK button.

9. Use the button to select whether to reject a phone call or fax reception from the
specified numbers, then press the OK button.
If you select Reject, you can register the fax/telephone number to reject.

When Register rejected no.? is displayed on the LCD, use the button to select Yes, then register
the fax/telephone number to reject.

For details on how to register the rejected number, see Registering the Rejected Number.

Note
• Even if you select Reject, the machine rings once.

(The machine may not ring depending on the country or region of purchase.)

747
Other Useful Fax Functions
Using the Information Services
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM
Document Stored in Machine's Memory
Summary of Reports and Lists

748
Using the Information Services
You can use various information services such as provided by banks, and make airline reservations or hotel
reservations. Since these services require tone dialing to use their services, you need to temporarily switch
to tone dialing if your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line.

Using the Touch Tone Line

Using the Rotary Pulse Line

Important
• You may need to contract with the service providers for some information services. For details, contact
the service providers.

Using the Touch Tone Line

• Dialing by Using the On Hook Dial Function

Note
• You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook setting in Security control under Fax
settings is set to Enable.

Security control

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Press the Color button or the Black button.

4. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the number of the information service.

5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the Numeric buttons to
press the numbers in accordance with the message.

6. Press the Stop button to finish using the service.

• Dialing by Using the Telephone Connected to the Machine

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Lift the handset of the telephone.

4. Use the telephone to dial the number of the information service.

5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the telephone to press the
numbers in accordance with the message.

6. Hang up the handset to finish using the service.

749
Using the Rotary Pulse Line
• Dialing by Using the On Hook Dial Function

Note
• You can use the on hook dial function only when Hook setting in Security control under Fax
settings is set to Enable.

Security control

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Press the Color button or the Black button.

4. Use the Numeric buttons to dial the number of the information service.
5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, press the Tone button to
switch to tone dialing.

6. Use the Numeric buttons to press the numbers in accordance with the message.

7. Press the Stop button to finish using the service.

• Dialing by Using the Telephone Connected to the Machine

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Lift the handset of the telephone.

4. Use the telephone to dial the number of the information service.

5. When the recorded message for the information service answers, use the telephone to switch to
tone dialing.

When you dial the number of the information service using the telephone connected to the
machine, you cannot use the machine to switch to tone dialing. For instructions on how to switch
to tone dialing, refer to your telephone's instruction manual.
6. Use the telephone to press the numbers in accordance with the message.

7. Hang up the handset to finish using the service.

750
Transmission/Reception of Faxes Using ECM
This machine is set to send/receive faxes in Error Correction Mode (ECM). If the recipient's fax machine is
compatible with ECM, ECM automatically corrects errors and resends the fax.

Note
• If the sender's or recipient's fax machine is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received
without automatic error correction.

• To receive color faxes, make sure that ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings is set to ON.

Adv. FAX settings

To disable ECM transmission/reception, set ECM TX and ECM RX in Adv. communication to OFF.

• Transmission may take longer when ECM is enabled.

751
Document Stored in Machine's Memory
If the sending faxes is not complete or the machine was not able to print the received faxes, these faxes are
stored in the machine's memory.

If an error occurred during a fax transmission, the document is not stored in the machine's memory.

In the following cases, the machine is not able to print the received fax and will automatically store the fax in
its memory.

• The amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print a fax.

• Paper has run out.

• A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded.

• Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings.

• You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a received fax.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord of the machine, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

For details on how to unplug the power cord, refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.

You can print or delete the faxes stored in the machine's memory.
• To print a document in the machine's memory:

Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

• To delete a document in the machine's memory:

Deleting a Document in Machine's Memory

Note
• When confirming, printing, or deleting a document stored in the machine's memory, you specify it by its
transaction number. If you do not know the transaction number for your target document, print the list of
documents (MEMORY LIST) first.

For details on how to print MEMORY LIST, see Printing a Document in Machine's Memory.

752
Printing a Document in Machine's Memory
You can print a specified document in the machine's memory or print all the received documents in its
memory at a time.

When printing a specified document, you specify it by its transaction number. If you do not know the
transaction number for your target document, print the list of documents (MEMORY LIST) first.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Load paper.

3. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

4. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

5. Use the button to select Memory reference, then press the OK button.

Note
• If no document is stored in the machine's memory, No documents in memory is displayed on the
LCD.

6. Use the button to select a print menu, then press the OK button.
You can select the following print menus.
• Print memory list

You can print a list of the documents in the machine's memory (MEMORY LIST).

MEMORY LIST shows the transaction number of the unsent or unprinted fax (TX/RX NO.),
transaction mode, recipient's number, and the date and time of the transaction.

A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" on MEMORY LIST indicates a document being sent. A
transaction number from "5001" to "9999" on MEMORY LIST indicates a document being received.
• Print specified doc.

You can specify the document and print it.

If you select this menu, the document selection screen is displayed.

Note
• A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" indicates a document being sent. A transaction
number from "5001" to "9999" indicates a document being received.
• Each mark before the transaction number indicates the following:

No mark: Indicates a black and white document.

: Indicates a color document.

753
 : Indicates the document during transmission.

: Indicates the document sent with sequential broadcasting.

• By pressing the button or the Tone button, the transaction number displayed on the LCD
is switched to transaction time or fax/telephone number.

Specify the document and print it following the procedure below.

1. Use the button to select the transaction number (TX/RX no.) of the document you want
to print, then press the OK button.

2. Use the button to select whether to print only the first page of the document, then press
the OK button.

◦ If you select Yes:

Only the first page of the document will be printed.
The document is still stored in the machine's memory.

◦ If you select No:

All pages of the document will be printed.

The screen to confirm whether to delete the printed document in the machine's memory is
displayed.

If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, the printed document in
the machine's memory is deleted.

Note
• If there is not the specified document in the machine's memory, No document is
displayed, and the machine returns to the previous screen.

• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the Stop button.

• Print all RX docs

If you select this menu, the confirmation screen is displayed.

You can print all the received documents in the machine's memory.

If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, all the documents in the
machine's memory will be printed.

Each time a document is printed, the screen to confirm whether to delete the printed document in
the machine's memory is displayed.

If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, the printed document in the
machine's memory is deleted.

754
Deleting a Document in Machine's Memory
You can delete a specified document in the machine's memory or delete all the documents in its memory at
a time.

Note
• When deleting a specified document, you specify it by its transaction number. If you do not know the
transaction number for your target document, print the list of documents (MEMORY LIST) first.
Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

3. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

4. Use the button to select Memory reference, then press the OK button.

Note
• If no document is stored in the machine's memory, No documents in memory is displayed on the
LCD.

5. Use the button to select a delete menu, then press the OK button.
You can select the following delete menus.

• Del. specified doc.

You can specify the document and delete it.

If you select this menu, the document selection screen is displayed.

Note
• A transaction number from "0001" to "4999" indicates a document being sent. A transaction
number from "5001" to "9999" indicates a document being received.
• Each mark before the transaction number indicates the following:

No mark: Indicates a black and white document.

: Indicates a color document.

: Indicates the document during transmission.

: Indicates the document sent with sequential broadcasting.

• By pressing the button or the Tone button, the transaction number displayed on the LCD
is switched to transaction time or fax/telephone number.

755
 Specify the document and delete it following the procedure below.

1. Use the button to select the transaction number (TX/RX no.) of the document you want
to delete, then press the OK button.

The confirmation screen is displayed.

2. Use the button to select the transaction number of the document you want to delete,
then press the OK button.
The specified document will be deleted from machine's memory.

Note
• If there is not the specified document in the machine's memory, No document is
displayed, and the machine returns to the previous screen.

• To return to the Fax standby screen, press the Stop button.

• Delete all docs

If you select this menu, the confirmation screen is displayed.
You can delete all the documents in the machine's memory.

If you select Yes using the button and press the OK button, all the documents in the
machine's memory will be deleted.

756
Summary of Reports and Lists
The machine prints the report of sending or receiving a fax automatically. You can print the list of the fax/
telephone number or the current settings.

Type of Reports and Lists

Printing Report or List

Type of Reports and Lists

Report or List Description

ACTIVITY REPORT Shows recent fax transactions at sight.

• You can print ACTIVITY REPORT manually.

For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.

• The * (asterisk) is appended to the history already printed on ACTIVITY REPORT.

• If you select Print for Activity report in Auto print settings under Fax settings, the
machine prints ACTIVITY REPORT for the 20 histories of sent and received faxes
automatically.

Auto print settings

Directory list Lists the numbers and names registered.

• RECIPIENT You can print the lists of the recipient and group dial.
TELEPHONE For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.
NUMBER LIST
• GROUP DIAL
TELEPHONE NO.
LIST

USER'S DATA LIST Lists the current settings of the machine and the registered sender information.

For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.

MEMORY LIST Lists the documents currently stored in the machine's memory.

For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.

Note
• You can print MEMORY LIST by selecting Print memory list in Memory reference
under FAX menu.

Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

REJECTED NUMBER Lists the rejected numbers.

LIST For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.

CALLER HISTORY Lists the caller history.

This list is available when Caller ID service is subscribed.

For details on the procedure to print, see Printing Report or List.

This list may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase.

TX REPORT/ERROR Either of these reports is printed after each fax transmission.

TX REPORT • At the time of purchase, ERROR TX REPORT is set to be printed only when a
transmission error occurred.

757
 You can set the machine to print TX REPORT each time it sends a document, or
disable printing of the report by selecting TX report in Auto print settings under Fax
settings.

You can also specify the print setting so that the first page of the fax is printed along
with the report.

Auto print settings

Note
• The first page of the fax is not printed in color transmission.

• MULTI TRANSMISSION REPORT is printed after sequential broadcasting of a

document.

• If an error occurs when you send a fax, the error number is printed on ERROR TX
REPORT (there are some errors for which the cause is also printed).

For details on the error number, see Errors When You Send a Fax.

MULTI This report is printed after sequential broadcasting of a document.

TRANSMISSION Confirms whether the transmission to all the recipients has been completed successfully.
REPORT
The procedure to print and the error number is same as TX REPORT.

RX REPORT This report is printed after each fax reception.

• At the time of purchase, the machine is set so that RX REPORT is not printed at all.

You can set the machine to print RX REPORT each time it receives a document, or
only when an error occurs by selecting RX report in Auto print settings under Fax
settings.
Auto print settings

• If an error occurs when you receive a fax, the error number is printed on RX REPORT
(there are some errors for which the cause is also printed).

For details on the error number, see Errors When You Receive a Fax.

MEMORY CLEAR Lists the deleted faxes in the machine's memory if the faxes stored in the machine's
REPORT memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord.

When the machine is turned on, Data error and Press [OK] are displayed on the LCD.
MEMORY CLEAR REPORT is printed by pressing the OK button.

Printing Report or List

This section describes the procedure to print the report or the list manually.

Print the following report or list manually.

• ACTIVITY REPORT

• Directory list (RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST/GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST)

• USER'S DATA LIST

• MEMORY LIST

• REJECTED NUMBER LIST

• CALLER HISTORY

758
 Note
• CALLER HISTORY may not be supported depending on the country or region of purchase.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Load paper.

3. Press the FAX button.

The Fax standby screen is displayed.

4. Press the Menu button.

The FAX menu screen is displayed.

5. Use the button to select Print reports/lists, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select the report or list you want to print, then press the OK button.
• When you select Directory list:

Use the button to select Recipient or Group dial, then press the OK button.

If you select Recipient, select whether to print RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in
alphabetical order, then press the OK button. If you select Yes, the machine prints RECIPIENT
TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in alphabetical order. If you select No, the machine prints
RECIPIENT TELEPHONE NUMBER LIST in numerical order.

If you select Group dial, the machine prints GROUP DIAL TELEPHONE NO. LIST.

• When you select an item other than Directory list:

Press the OK button.

The machine prints the selected report or list.

Errors When You Send a Fax

If an error occurs when you send a fax, the error number is printed on ERROR TX REPORT or ACTIVITY
REPORT (there are some errors for which the cause is also printed).

The causes corresponding to the error numbers are as follows.

No. Cause Action

#001 Document is jammed in The document is jammed in the ADF.

the ADF. When the error is cleared, redo the operation.

#003 Document is too long. You attempted to send a document longer than 15.75 inches / 400 mm.

You cannot send a document longer than 15.75 inches / 400 mm from the ADF.

"#003" is also printed if it takes time to send a page. Divide the document or set
the image quality (Fax resolution) to a lower setting, then resend it.

#005 No answer. The recipient's fax machine does not respond.

759
 Contact the recipient and have the recipient check that the telephone line is
connected correctly.

#012 Try again. There is no paper in the recipient's fax machine.

Contact the recipient and have the recipient load paper.

#017 No tone is detected. The machine could not detect the dial tone.

Dial tone detect in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings is set to ON. Set to
OFF.

Adv. FAX settings

#018 Line was busy. The fax/telephone number you dialed is busy.

Try dialing again after waiting for a moment.

#022 Number is deleted. The fax/telephone number registered in the machine's directory is incorrect.

Check the recipient's fax/telephone number, correct the fax/telephone number

registered in the machine's directory, then send the document again.

Changing Registered Information

#037 Memory is full. The machine could not send a fax because its memory is full.

Delete contents in memory, then send a fax again.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

#059 Transmission has been Transmission has been canceled because the machine could not detect the
canceled due to a fax recipient's fax machine information or the information did not match the dialed
information mismatch. number. This message is displayed when Check RX FAX info in Security
control under Fax settings is set to ON.

For details, see Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the
Recipient's Information).

#085 Try again in black & white The recipient's fax machine is not color-compatible.
transmission. Resend the document in black & white.

#099 The Stop button was The Stop button was pressed to cancel transmission of the document. Resend it
pressed during if necessary.
transmission.

#412 The fax could not be sent The fax could not be sent from the computer (Windows only). Ensure that the
from the computer. machine is connected with the computer correctly and redo operation.

#995 The unsent fax was While automatic redialing, the unsent fax is stored in the machine's memory
deleted while automatic temporarily until the sending fax is complete. If a power failure occurs or you
redialing. unplug the power cord before automatic redialing is complete, all faxes stored in
the machine's memory are deleted and not sent.

Resend the document.

Errors When You Receive a Fax

If an error occurs when you receive a fax, the error number is printed on RX REPORT or ACTIVITY
REPORT (there are some errors for which the cause is also printed).

The causes corresponding to the error numbers are as follows.

760
No. Cause Action

#003 It takes too long to receive Contact the sender and have the sender divide the fax or set the image quality
a page. (Fax resolution) to a lower setting and resend it.

#005 No answer. When receiving a fax manually, the machine could not detect the signals from the
sender's fax machine.

Contact the sender and have the sender resend it, or set the machine to receive
the fax automatically.

#037 Memory is full. The machine could not receive a fax because its memory is full.

Delete contents in memory, then ask the sender to resend the fax. See
Document Stored in Machine's Memory.

#046 Reception has been Reception has been rejected because the fax matches the fax rejection condition
rejected due to the specified by FAX RX reject in Security control under Fax settings.
specified fax rejection For details, see Rejecting Fax Reception.
condition.

#099 The Stop button was The Stop button was pressed to cancel reception of the fax. Contact the sender
pressed during reception. and have the sender resend it if necessary.

#995 The received fax was The received fax was deleted before being printed. Contact the sender and have
deleted. the sender resend it if necessary.

761
Sending Faxes from a Computer
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver) Basic
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes (Fax Driver)
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver
General Notes (Fax Driver)

762
Sending a FAX (Fax Driver)
You can send faxes using the fax driver from applications that support document printing.

Note
• Only black and white transmission is supported.

1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click
the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.)

3. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where
"XXX" is the model name).

4. Click Print or OK.

* Print dialog box in Notepad

Note
• Click Preferences or Properties in the Print dialog box to open the print settings dialog box of
the fax driver in which you can set the paper size and print orientation. For details on how to open
the print settings dialog box of the fax driver, see "How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax
Driver."

5. Click Display Address Book... in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.

763
6. Select a recipient from Recipient Name in the Select Recipient from Address Book
dialog box, then click Set as Recipient.
The selected recipient is reflected in Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.

Important
• You cannot specify a recipient if there is no recipient registered in the address book. Register the
recipient in the address book and reopen the address book.

For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an Address Book (Fax
Driver)."
• If the recipient's fax/telephone number is entered incorrectly or the registered fax/telephone
number is incorrect, the fax may be sent to an unexpected recipient. When sending an important
fax, it is recommended that you send it after confirming the entered information and recipient's
status.

Note
• You can also specify Recipient by entering the Recipient Name and Fax Number in Direct
Entry in the Send FAX dialog box and then clicking Set as Recipient.
• For details on valid characters, see "General Notes (Fax Driver)."
• You can send faxes even if only the Fax Number is entered.

764
 • You can register the recipient you entered to the address book by clicking Add to Address
Book.... For details on how to register recipients in the address book, see "Creating an
Address Book (Fax Driver)."
• Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed.

(Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX", enter
"0XXX-XXXX".)

7. Click Send Now.

When a confirmation message is displayed, click OK.

Important
• If you cannot send a fax due to line failure, etc., see "Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes
(Fax Driver)."

Canceling Transmission
If you click Send Now in the Send FAX dialog box, the printer icon is displayed in the taskbar. Double-
click this icon to display the list of fax jobs awaiting transmission or being sent.

Right-clicking a job and selecting Cancel stops transmission.

765
Creating an Address Book (Fax Driver)
By using the address book, you can send a fax by simply specifying a recipient from it. You can register the
recipient's name, fax number and other information in the address book.

Registering a recipient (WAB contact) in the address book

You can register an individual recipient (Contact) in the address book.

1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver.

2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box.

Note
• In Windows XP, when you open the address book for the first time, the Setup Windows
Address Book dialog box will be displayed. Refer to "Setup when Opening the Address Book
for the First Time (Windows XP)" for details.
• In Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista, you can register an individual recipient
(Contact) in the address book folder (Windows Contacts) as an address book file (.contact file)
which can be used in multiple applications. However, you cannot change the address book you
use, as only one address book can be created per user.

Follow the steps below to open Windows Contacts.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

Select the Search charm, then search for "Contacts".

• Windows 7/Windows Vista:

Select XXXX (user name) from the Start menu, then double-click Contacts.

3. In the Address Book dialog box, click New.

766
4. Select Contact in the New Entry dialog box, then click OK.

Note
• For faxing, you can only specify the Contact (one recipient). You cannot specify a Distribution
List.

5. Enter the First, Middle, and Last of the contact in the Name and E-mail tab (Name tab
when using Windows XP) on the Properties dialog box.
The recipient's name will be printed at the top of the fax received by the recipient.

767
6. Enter the fax number on the Home or Work tab, then click OK.
An individual recipient (Contact) is registered in the address book.

Note
• You can also register a recipient by clicking the Add to Address Book... button on the Send
FAX dialog box after entering the recipient.

• Add the outside line access number before the fax number as needed.

(Example: When the outside line access number is "0" and the fax number is "XXX-XXXX",
enter "0XXX-XXXX".)
• If you upgrade from Windows XP to Windows Vista, the address book you created in Windows
XP may not be reflected in Windows Vista. In this case, open the address book in the following
procedure and reflect the information to a new address book.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Folder
Options.
2. Click the View tab of the Folder Options dialog box, select Show hidden files and
folders in Advanced settings, then click OK.

768
 3. From the Start menu, select XXXX (user name), then double-click AppData > Roaming >
Canon > MP5 to open the folder.
4. Double-click the ".wab" file.

The address book will be reflected in Windows Vista automatically.

Related Topic
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)

769
Setup when Opening the Address Book for the First Time
(Windows XP)
In Windows XP, when you open the address book for the first time, the Setup Windows Address Book
dialog box will be displayed and you can set the Windows Address Book you want to use.

To Create a New Windows Address Book (WAB File) Exclusively for Faxing:
Select Create a new Windows Address Book file for faxing., then click OK.

To Use an Existing Windows Address Book:

Click Select existing Windows Address Book file., select an address book file from the list, then click OK.

Using an existing Windows Address Book enables you to share it with other applications that use Windows
Address Books.

This option cannot be selected if there is no Windows Address Book file created.

Note
• You can also change the setting by clicking Address Book Profile... in the print settings dialog box of
the fax driver so as to use another Windows Address Book.
• You can import the entries from one Windows Address Book file into another, combining both sets of
Windows Address Book entries. To import fax recipient contacts in an Address Book file to an existing
Address Book file, follow the steps below.

1. From the Start menu, select Search.

2. Click All files and folders.
3. In the file name box, enter ".wab".
4. Select the Search hidden files and folders checkbox in More advanced options, then click
Search.
5. From the found Windows Address Book files, double-click an existing Windows Address Book file.

The existing Windows Address Book opens.

6. In the File menu, in import, select Address Book (WAB)....
7. Select the Windows Address Book containing fax recipient contacts, then click Open.
8. When a completion message appears, click OK.

770
How to Open the Setting Screen of the Fax Driver
The following explains how to display the print settings dialog box or the Properties dialog box of the fax
driver from your application or from the fax/printer icon.

Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from an Application

1. Click the Print command in the application.

In general, you can open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu.

2. Select "your model name," then click Preferences (or Properties).

The print settings dialog box of the fax driver appears.

Opening the Print Settings Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer
Icon
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printing Preferences, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the
model name.)

• Windows 7:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printing Preferences, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the
model name.)

• Windows Vista:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Printing Preferences....

• Windows XP:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >
Printers and Faxes.

771
 2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Printing Preferences....

Opening the Properties Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer
Icon
• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:

1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printer Properties, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model
name.)

• Windows 7:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series Printer icon or Canon XXX series FAX icon and
select Printer Properties, then Canon XXX series FAX. (Where "XXX" is the model
name.)

• Windows Vista:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Properties.

• Windows XP:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >
Printers and Faxes.

2. Right-click the Canon XXX series FAX icon (where "XXX" is the model name) and
select Properties.

772
Edit or Remove a Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)
You can change the recipients' names, fax numbers and other information, or delete recipients registered in
the address book.

Editing Recipients in an address book

1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver.

2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box.

3. Select the recipient you want to edit from the Address Book dialog box, then click
Properties....

4. Change information as needed on the Properties dialog box, then click OK.

773
Removing Recipients from an address book

1. Open the print settings dialog box of the fax driver.

2. Click Address Book... in the displayed dialog box.

3. Select the recipient you want to delete from the Address Book dialog box, then click
Delete.

774
4. When a confirmation message is displayed, click Yes.

775
Search for a Recipient in an Address Book (Fax Driver)
You can search for recipients registered in the address book by name.

1. Open the document you want to fax with an application (such as Notepad), and then click
the Print command. (The command is Print... on the File menu.)

2. In Select Printer or Name in the Print dialog box, select Canon XXX series FAX (where
"XXX" is the model name).

3. Click Print or OK.

* Print dialog box in Notepad

4. Click Display Address Book... in Set Recipient in the Send FAX dialog box.

5. Enter the name of the recipient you want to search for in Search by Recipient in the
Select Recipient from Address Book dialog box.

776
If the entered name is found, the recipient will be displayed in the contact list with its name selected.

While the name is selected, click Set as Recipient to enter it as the recipient.

Important
• You cannot search by criteria other than name.

777
Troubleshooting Problems Sending Faxes (Fax Driver)
Check 1 Is the power turned on?
You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.

If you disconnected the power cord without turning off the power (one of the buttons on the operation panel is lit),
reconnecting it turns on the power.

If you disconnected the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (no buttons on the
operation panel are lit), reconnect it, then press the ON button to turn on the power.

If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power failure
is resolved.

Important
• Confirm that all lamps on the operation panel are off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the
power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.

Note
• If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory will be printed after turning the machine on.

Check 2 Is a document being sent from memory or a fax being received into memory?
When the message for the transmission/reception is displayed on the machine's LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
monitor, a fax is being sent from/received into machine's memory. Wait until the transmission/reception is
complete.

Check 3 Is the telephone line type set correctly?

Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.

Check 4 Is Dial tone detect set to ON?

Resend the fax after a while.
If you still cannot send the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Advanced FAX settings under FAX settings.

Check 5 Is the recipient's fax number correct?

Check the recipient's fax number, then send the document again.

Sending a FAX (Fax Driver)

Note
• For details on how to change the recipients registered in the address book, see "Edit or Remove a
Recipient from an Address Book (Fax Driver)."

Check 6 Does an error occur during transmission?

Check if a message is displayed in the computer screen.

If displayed, check the message, then resolve the error.

778
 Check 7 Does a printer error occur?
Check if a message is displayed on the LCD monitor.
If a support code is displayed, see "Support Code List" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.

If no support code is displayed, see "A Message Is Displayed" for your model from Home of the Online Manual.
If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, then send the fax.

Check 8 Is the telephone line connected correctly?

Reconnect the telephone line cable to the telephone line jack.
If the telephone line is connected correctly, then there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your
telephone company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or telephone adapter.

779
General Notes (Fax Driver)
This fax driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using the fax
driver.

• The fax driver may not work correctly when sending a Microsoft Excel 2002 document as a fax with the
Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option checked in Microsoft Excel 2002. Follow the instructions below
to solve the problem:

1. Click Options... from the Tools menu.

2. Uncheck the Allow A4/Letter Paper Resizing option on the International tab.

• When using a network compatible printer, you cannot send faxes from multiple computers at the same
time. If you try to send a fax from a computer while a fax is being sent from another computer, a
message appears and your fax cannot be sent.

Make sure that a fax is not being sent from another computer.
• If you assign the fax driver to the Bluetooth port, you cannot send a fax from the computer.
• You can use the following characters for Fax Number:

Character Explanation

0-9*# For use in telephone and fax numbers.

,p To place a pause between numbers.

P To place a pause at the end of a sequence of numbers.

T Numbers after the T will be sent as a tone signal.

+ - ( ), space To make the number easier to read. You cannot insert a space at the front of a number.

*You cannot use ".", "R", "M", or "E".

• You can enter the following number of characters in Recipient Name and Fax Number.
Recipient Name: Up to 16 characters

Fax Number: Up to 60 characters

* The number of characters you can enter differs in some regions.

• The fax driver does not work correctly if you uncheck the Enable printer pooling option on the Ports
tab of the Canon XXX series FAX Properties dialog box (where "XXX" is the model name). Check that
the option is checked.

For details on how to open the Canon XXX series FAX Properties dialog box, see "Opening the Properties
Dialog Box of the Fax Driver from the Fax/Printer Icon."

780
Troubleshooting
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
Printing Does Not Start
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Ink Is Not Ejected
Paper Jams
If an Error Occurs
Cannot Send a Fax
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
List of Support Code for Error

Search Each Function

Problems with Network Communication
Problems while Printing/Scanning from Smartphone/Tablet
Problems with Printing
Problems with Scanning
Problems with Faxing
Problems with the Machine
Problems with Installation/Downloading
About Errors/Messages Displayed
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem

781
Problems with Network Communication
Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network
Problems with the Machine while Using with Network
Other Problems with Network

782
Cannot Detect a Machine on a Network
Cannot Detect the Machine when Setting Up Network Communication
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN

783
Cannot Detect the Machine when Setting Up Network
Communication
If the machine could not be detected on the network when setting up the network communication, confirm
the network settings before redetecting the machine.

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1

Important
• If the machine cannot be detected while you are setting up the network communication using a USB
cable, the machine may be in the access point mode. In this case, finish the access point mode and
enable the wireless LAN, then try to redetect the machine.

Using the Printer with the Access Point Mode

784
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 1

Are the machine and network device (router, etc.) turned on?
Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Confirming that the Power Is On

Make sure that the network device (router, etc.) is turned on.

If the machine or the network device is turned off:

Turn on the machine or the network device.

After turning on the machine or the network device, it may take some time until ready for use. After a while
just turning on the machine or the network device, click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.

When the machine is detected, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network
communication.

If the machine and the network device are turned on:

If the machine could not be detected after clicking Redetect even when the machine and the network
device are turned on, or when you have turned them on, go to check 2.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 2

785
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 2

Is the wireless LAN setting of the machine enabled?

Make sure that the or icon is displayed on the LCD.

If the icon is not displayed:

The wireless LAN setting of the machine is disabled. Enable the wireless LAN setting of the machine.

After enabling the wireless LAN setting, click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to
set up the network communication from the beginning.

If the icon is displayed:

Go to check 3.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 3

786
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 3

Is the machine connected to the wireless router?

By using the icon on the LCD, make sure that the machine is connected to the wireless router.

If the icon is displayed:

The machine may be placed far away from the wireless router. Place the machine near the wireless router
temporarily, then click Redetect on the Check Printer Settings screen.

When the machine is detected, follow the instructions on the screen to continue to set up the network
communication.

If the machine cannot be detected, the machine is not connected to the wireless router. Connect the
machine to the wireless router.

Click Back to Top on the Check Printer Settings screen to try to set up the network communication from
the beginning.

If the icon is displayed:

Go to check 4.

Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 4

787
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 4

Does the firewall function of your security software or operating system for
computer interfere with setting up the network communication?
The firewall function of your security software or operating system for computer may limit communications
between the machine and your computer. Confirm the setting of firewall function of your security software
or operating system or the message appearing on your computer.

If the firewall function interferes with setting up:

• When the message appears on your computer:

If the message warning that Canon software is attempting to access the network appears on the
computer, set the security software to allow access.

• When the message does not appear on your computer:

Cancel to set up, then set the security software to allow Canon software* to access the network.

* On the Setup CD-ROM, select win > Driver > DrvSetup, then set the security software to allow the
file Setup.exe or Setup64.exe to access the network.

After setting the security software, try to set up the network communication from the beginning.

Note
• For the operating system firewall settings or the security software firewall settings, refer to the
instruction manual of the computer or software, or contact its manufacturer.

If there is no problem with the firewall settings:

Go to check 5.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 5

788
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 5

Check the settings of the wireless router.

Check the settings of the wireless router for the network connection such as IP address filtering, MAC
address filtering, or DHCP function.

Make sure that the radio channel of the wireless router and that assigned to the machine are the same.
For details on how to check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer.

If there is no problem with the settings of the wireless router:

Go to check 6.
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 6

789
Cannot Detect the Machine during Wireless LAN Setup: Check 6

Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the
machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.

In addition, check where the machine and the wireless router are located and take the appropriate action.
• Make sure that there is no obstruction between the machine and the wireless router.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the
machine and the wireless router.
• Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference near the machine or the wireless router.

If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is
placed nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the machine or the wireless router as far
away from the interference source as possible.

After checking above and taking the appropriate action, perform setup again.

Note
• You can set up the network communication via USB. To set up via USB, select the Set up the
network connection via USB check box on the Check Printer Settings screen and click Next.

790
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Wireless LAN

Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive?

Check3 When the machine is connected to the computer temporarily using a USB
cable, make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.
When you set up the wireless LAN connection or change the wireless LAN settings using IJ Network Tool
through USB connection, make sure that the machine is connected to the computer with a USB cable securely.

Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable

Check4 Make sure that the machine setup is completed.

If not, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Check5 When using IJ Network Tool, click Update to search for the machine again.
Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Check6 When searching for a machine over a network, make sure that the machine is
associated with the port.
When No Driver is displayed under Name in IJ Network Tool, there is no association. Select Associate Port on
the Settings menu, then associate the port with the machine.
When the Printer Driver Is Not Associated with a Port

Check7 Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with those of
the wireless router.
Refer to the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer to check the wireless
router settings, and then modify the machine settings.

How to Set an Encryption Key

Check8 Make sure that there is no obstruction.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the devices.

Check9 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the machine
within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.

Check10 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.

791
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed nearby,
the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source as
possible.

Check11 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
Make sure that the computer can communicate with the wireless router over the wireless LAN.

Check12 Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of
the properties dialog box of the printer driver.

Check13 Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that Canon
software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to
always allow access.
If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a
firewall by default.

Check14 When using a router, connect the machine and computer to the LAN side
(same network segment).
If the problem is not resolved, perform setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the
instructions on our website.

792
Problems with the Machine while Using with Network
The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly
Forgot a Wireless Router Name, SSID, or a Network Key
The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten
Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing a Wireless Router or Changing Its
Settings
Printing Speed Is Slow
Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of the Machine

793
The Machine Stopped Working Suddenly
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after the Network Settings Are Changed

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN

Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point Mode

Cannot Print, Scan, or Fax from a Computer Connected to the Network

Cannot Communicate with the Machine after the Network Settings Are
Changed

It may take a while for the computer to obtain the IP address, or you may need to restart your computer.

Search for the machine again after confirming a valid IP address is assigned to the computer.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN

Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Check2 Are the network settings of the machine identical with those of the wireless
router?
Make sure that the network settings of the machine (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key, etc.) are
identical with those of the wireless router.
To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its
manufacturer.
To check the current network settings of the machine, print out the network setting information.
Printing Out Network Setting Information

If the network settings of the machine are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the network
settings of the machine to match with those of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.

Check3 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the
machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.

Check4 Make sure that there is no obstruction.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the devices.

Check5 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.

794
 Check6 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
For the procedures to connect a network device to the computer and set them up, refer to the instruction
manual of your network device or contact its manufacturer.

Check7 Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions
while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status

Check8 Make sure that a valid wireless channel is used.

The wireless channel to be used may be limited depending on wireless network devices installed in the
computer. Refer to the instruction manual provided with your computer or your wireless network device to
specify the valid wireless channel.

Check9 Make sure that the channel confirmed in Check 8 can communicate with the
computer.
If not, change the channel set to the wireless router.

Check10 Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that Canon
software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the security software to
always allow access.
If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some programs will enable a
firewall by default.

Check11 When using a router, connect the machine and computer to the LAN side
(same network segment).
If the problem is not resolved, perform setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the
instructions on our website.

• For placement:
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the wireless router and the machine.

Note
• When you connect the machine to a Windows XP computer by cableless setup:
Follow the procedure below to perform settings of the machine and the computer.

1. Enable the access point mode of the machine.

2. Right-click the Wireless Network Connections icon on the notification area on the desktop,
then click View Available Wireless Networks.

3. Select the network name on the screen displayed, then click Connect.
Select "XXXXXX-MXXXXseries" ("XX" represents alphanumeric characters.) as the network
name.

4. Enter the network key on the screen displayed, then click Connect.
As a default, the serial number of the machine is used as a network key. Confirm the serial
number on the rear of the machine.

795
 5. Perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point

Mode

Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive
or Wireless LAN?
Select Access point mode.

Check3Have you selected the machine as the destination of your external

communication devices (e.g. computers, smartphones, or tablets)?
Select the access point name (SSID) of the machine with your external communication devices.

Check4 Have you entered the proper password specified for the access point mode?
If the security setting of the access point mode is enabled, you need to enter the password to connect your
external communication device to the machine. Confirm the specified password, then enter the proper one.

Check5 Make sure that external communication devices are not placed far away from
the machine.
Locate your external communication device close enough to communicate with the machine.

Check6 Make sure that there is no obstruction.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the devices.

Check7 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.

Check8 Are you trying to connect 6 devices or more?

You can connect up to 5 devices using the access point mode.

Cannot Print, Scan, or Fax from a Computer Connected to the

Network

Check1 Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.

796
For the procedures to set up the computer, refer to the instruction manual of your computer or contact its
manufacturer.

Check2 If the MP Drivers are not installed, install them.

Install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

Check3 Make sure that access control is not set to the wireless router.
For the procedures to connect a wireless router and set it up, refer to the instruction manual of your wireless
router or contact its manufacturer.

Note
• To check the MAC address or the IP address of the computer, see Checking the IP Address or the MAC
Address of the Computer.

797
Forgot a Wireless Router Name, SSID, or a Network Key
Cannot Connect with a Wireless Router to Which a WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP
or WPA/WPA2 Key)

How to Set an Encryption Key

Cannot Connect with a Wireless Router to Which a WEP or WPA/

WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP or WPA/WPA2 Key)

For information on how to set up the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
wireless router or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the wireless router can
communicate with each other.

After that, set up the machine to match the settings of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.

How to Set an Encryption Key

For information on how to set up the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with the
wireless router or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the wireless router can
communicate with each other.

After that, set up the machine to match the settings of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.

• When using WEP

The key length, key format, the key to use (one of 1 to 4), and the authentication method must match
among the wireless router, the machine, and the computer.

In order to communicate with a wireless router that uses automatically generated WEP keys, you
must configure the machine to use the key generated by the wireless router by entering it in
hexadecimal format.

Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. Otherwise, select Open System or Shared Key
according to the setting of the wireless router.

When the WEP Details screen appears after clicking Set on the Search screen, follow the on-screen
instructions and set the key length, the key format, the key number, and the authentication method to
enter a WEP key.

For details, see Changing the WEP Detailed Settings.

• When using WPA/WPA2

The authentication method, passphrase, and dynamic encryption type must match on the wireless
router, the machine, and the computer.

Enter the passphrase configured on the wireless router (a sequence of between 8 and 63
alphanumeric characters, or a 64-character hexadecimal number).

798
Either TKIP (basic encryption) or AES (secure encryption) is selected automatically for the dynamic
encryption method.

For details, see Changing the WPA/WPA2 Detailed Settings.

Note
• This machine supports WPA/WPA2-PSK (WPA/WPA2-Personal) and WPA2-PSK (WPA2-
Personal).

799
The Administrator Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten

Initialize the machine settings.

Select All data, then the administrator password returns to the default.

Reset setting

After initializing the machine settings, perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the
instructions on our website.

800
Cannot Use the Machine on Replacing a Wireless Router or
Changing Its Settings

When you replace a wireless router, perform network setup of the machine again.

Perform network setup again with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it again according to the instructions on
our website.

If the problem is not resolved, see below.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering an Encryption
Key to the Wireless Router

When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate with the Machine after the Encryption Type Was
Switched on the Wireless Router

Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP

Address Filtering or Entering an Encryption Key to the Wireless Router

Check1 Confirm the wireless router setting.

Refer to the instruction manual provided with the wireless router or contact its manufacturer to confirm the
wireless router setting. Make sure that the computer and the wireless router can communicate with each other
under this setting.

Check2 If you are performing MAC address filtering or IP address filtering at the
wireless router, confirm that the MAC address or IP address for both the computer or the
network device and the machine are registered.

Check3 If you are using a WEP or WPA/WPA2 key, make sure that the encryption
key for the computer or the network device and the machine matches that set to the
wireless router.
Besides the WEP key itself, the key length, key format, the key ID to use, and the authentication method must
match among the machine, the wireless router, and the computer.

Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open
System or Shared Key according to the setting of the wireless router.

How to Set an Encryption Key

801
 When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate with the Machine
after the Encryption Type Was Switched on the Wireless Router

If the machine cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the machine was
switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the wireless router matches that set to
the machine.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering an
Encryption Key to the Wireless Router

802
Printing Speed Is Slow

Check1 The machine may be printing out a large job issued from another computer.

Check2 Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation positions
while monitoring the radio status with IJ Network Tool.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the wireless router and the machine. Wireless
communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. The metal, concrete, or timber including the
metallic material, mud wall, or insulator may interrupt a wireless communication. If the machine cannot
communicate with the computer over a wireless LAN for the wall material, place the machine and the computer
in the same room or floor.

Check3 Make sure that there is no source of interference in your vicinity.

If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed nearby,
the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source as
possible.

803
Ink Remaining Level Is Not Displayed on Printer Status Monitor of
the Machine

Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication.

Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

804
Other Problems with Network
The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen during Setup
Packets Are Sent Steadily
Checking Information about the Network
How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default

805
The Message Is Displayed on the Computer Screen during Setup
The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed during Setup

The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Wireless Router in the Search
Screen

"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed

The Enter Password Screen Is Displayed during Setup

The following screen is displayed if an administrator password is set to the machine which has already
been set up to use via a network.

Enter the administrator password you have set.

Note
• An administrator password is already specified for the machine at the time of purchase.

For details:

About the Administrator Password

For improving security, we recommend to change the administrator password.

Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet

The Screen for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the
Wireless Router in the Search Screen

This screen is displayed automatically if the selected wireless router is encrypted. In this case, configure
the details to use the same encryption settings set to the wireless router.

For information on the encryption settings, see Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet.

"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless

network" Is Displayed

806
Security is not configured on the wireless router. The machine can still be used, so continue the setup
procedure to complete it.

Important
• If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of disclosing
data such as your personal information to a third party.

807
Packets Are Sent Steadily

While IJ Network Scanner Selector EX is enabled, it periodically transmits packets to check whether it can
communicate with the machine over the network. When using the computer in a network environment other
than the one used to set up the machine, disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

To disable IJ Network Scanner Selector EX, right-click the icon on the notification area on the
desktop, then select Disable Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector EX.

808
Checking Information about the Network
Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer

Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Wireless Router Can Communicate

Checking the Network Setting Information

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine

To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, print out the network setting information
using the operation panel of the machine.

Printing Out Network Setting Information

To display the network setting information using IJ Network Tool, select Network Information on the
View menu.

Canon IJ Network Tool Screen

Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer

To check the IP address or MAC address assigned to the computer, follow the procedure below.

1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command
Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for
"Command Prompt".
• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Command Prompt.

2. Enter "ipconfig/all" and press the Enter key.

The IP addresses and the MAC addresses of the network devices installed on your computer are
displayed. When the network device is not connected to the network, the IP address is not displayed.

Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the

Wireless Router Can Communicate

To check that communication is available, perform the ping test.

809
 1. Select Command Prompt as shown below.
• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Command Prompt from the Start screen. If Command
Prompt is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for
"Command Prompt".

• In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start > All Programs > Accessories >
Command Prompt.

2. Type the ping command and the IP address of the target machine or the target wireless
router, and then press the Enter key.
ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
If the communication is available, a message such as the following is displayed.
Reply from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255
When Request timed out is displayed, the communication is not available.

Checking the Network Setting Information

To check the network setting information of the machine, print out the network setting information using
the operation panel of the machine.

Printing Out Network Setting Information

810
How to Restore the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default

Important
• Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing, scanning, or faxing
operation from a computer over network becomes impossible. To use the machine over network,
perform setup with the Setup CD-ROM or perform it according to the instructions on our website.

Select LAN settings on the operation panel of the machine to initialize the network setting.
Reset setting

811
Problems while Printing/Scanning from Smartphone/Tablet
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet

812
Cannot Print/Scan from Smartphone/Tablet

If you cannot print from your smartphone/tablet, it is possible that your smartphone/tablet cannot
communicate with the machine.

Confirm the cause of your problem according to the connection method.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN

Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point Mode

Note
• For problems on printing with other connection methods or details on how to perform settings of each
connection method:

Using PIXMA Cloud Link

Printing with Google Cloud Print

Printing from AirPrint Compliant Device

Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Wireless LAN

If your smartphone/tablet cannot communicate with the machine, check the following.

Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive
or Access point mode?
Select Wireless LAN.

Check3 Are the network settings of the machine identical with those of the wireless
router?
Make sure that the network settings of the machine (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key, etc.) are
identical with those of the wireless router.

To check the settings of the wireless router, refer to the instruction manual provided with it or contact its
manufacturer.

To check the current network settings of the machine, print out the network setting information.

Printing Out Network Setting Information

If the network settings of the machine are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the network
settings of the machine to match with those of the wireless router using IJ Network Tool.

Check4 Are the network settings of your smartphone/tablet identical with those of the
wireless router?
Make sure that the network settings of your smartphone/tablet (e.g. wireless router name, SSID, network key,
etc.) are identical with those of the wireless router.

813
To check the settings of your smartphone/tablet, refer to the instruction manual provided with it.
If the network settings of your smartphone/tablet are not identical with those of the wireless router, change the
network settings of it to match with those of the wireless router.

Check5 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
The wireless router is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication. Locate the
machine within 164 ft. / 50 m from the wireless router.

Check6 Make sure that there is no obstruction.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the devices.

Check7 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.

Cannot Communicate with the Machine while It Is in the Access Point Mode
If your smartphone/tablet cannot communicate with the machine in the access point mode, check the
following.

Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Check2 Is Change LAN in LAN settings under Device settings set to LAN inactive
or Wireless LAN?
Select Access point mode.

Check3 Confirm the settings of your smartphone/tablet.

Make sure that your smartphone/tablet can use the wireless LAN.
For details on how to perform setting of the wireless LAN, refer to the instruction manual provided with your
smartphone/tablet.

Check4 Have you selected the machine as the destination of your smartphone/tablet?
Select the access point name (SSID) of the machine with your smartphone/tablet.

Check5 Have you entered the proper password specified for the access point mode?
If the security setting of the access point mode is enabled, you need to enter the password to connect your
smartphone/tablet to the machine. Confirm the specified password, then enter the proper one.

Check6 Make sure that the machine is not placed far away from the wireless router.
Locate your smartphone/tablet close enough to communicate with the machine.

Check7 Make sure that there is no obstruction.

Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the location of the devices.

Check8 Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your vicinity.

814
If a device (e.g. microwave oven) using the same frequency bandwidth as the wireless station is placed
nearby, the device may cause interference. Place the wireless station as far away from the interference source
as possible.

Check9 Are you trying to connect 6 smartphones/tablets or more?

You can connect up to 5 smartphones/tablets using the access point mode.

815
Problems with Printing
Printing Does Not Start
Paper Jams
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Ink Is Not Ejected
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed

816
Printing Does Not Start

Check1 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then press the ON button
to turn the machine on.
While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and
remains lit.

Note
• When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing. While the
POWER lamp is flashing, the computer is processing data and sending it to the machine. Wait until printing
starts.

Check2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely
plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:

• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the
computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device. Consult
the reseller of the relay device for details.

• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing again.

When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over network correctly.

Check3 Is the access point mode enabled?

When you print using a mode other than the access point mode, disable the access point mode in advance.

Check4 Make sure that the paper output tray is open.

Check5 Are the paper settings identical with those registered to the cassette?
When the paper settings are not identical with those registered to the cassette, an error message is displayed.
Resolve the error according to the instructions on the LCD.

Paper setting for Printing

Note
• You can disable the message which prevents misprinting.

• To change the setting using the operation panel:

Cassette settings

• To change the setting using the printer driver:

Changing the Printer Operation Mode

817
 Check6 If you are printing from the computer and there are any unnecessary print jobs,
delete them.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job

Check7 Make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print dialog box.
The machine will not print properly if you are using a printer driver for a different printer.
Make sure that "Canon XXX series Printer" (where "XXX" is your machine's name) is selected in the Print dialog
box.

Note
• To make the machine the one selected by default, select Set as Default Printer.

Check8 Configure the printer port appropriately.

Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately.

1. Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.

2. Select items as shown below.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Hardware
and Sound > Devices and Printers.

• In Windows 7, select Devices and Printers from the Start menu.

• In Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
• In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers
and Faxes.

3. Open the properties of the printer driver for the machine.

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where
"XXX" is your machine's name), then select Printer properties.

• In Windows Vista or Windows XP, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where "XXX" is your
machine's name), then select Properties.

4. Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings.

Make sure that a port named "USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) with "Canon XXX series Printer" appearing
in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).

Note
• When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as
"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a
character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.

• If the setting is incorrect:

Reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.

• Printing does not start even though the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable and
the port named "USBnnn" is selected:

In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select My Printer on the Start screen to start My Printer. If My Printer
is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "My Printer".

Set the correct printer port on Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set
the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.

818
 In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon Utilities,
Canon My Printer, Canon My Printer, then select Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-
screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.

If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.

• Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the
machine is used over LAN:

Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then associate
the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.

Check9 Is the size of the print data extremely large?

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Then, set Prevention of Print Data Loss in
the displayed dialog to On.
* When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss, print quality may be reduced.

Check10 Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer.

819
Paper Jams

When paper is jammed, a troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action
described in the message.

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen:

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the LCD:

For details on how to remove the jammed paper, refer to List of Support Code for Error (When Paper Is
Jammed).

Note
• You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer or on the LCD by
searching a Support Code.

Click Here to Search

820
Print Results Not Satisfactory

If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the
paper and print quality settings first.

Check1 Do the page size and media type settings match the size and type of the loaded
paper?
When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result.

If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality of the
printout color.

Also, if you print with an incorrect paper type setting, the printed surface may be scratched.

In borderless printing, uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type setting and
the loaded paper.

To copy by operating the machine Confirm by using the operation panel on the machine.

Setting Items for Copying

To print from a computer Confirm by using the printer driver.

Printing with Easy Setup

Check2 Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected referring to the table in
Check 1.
Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing. If you notice blurs or uneven colors,
increase the print quality and try printing again.

Check3 If the problem is not resolved, there may be other causes.

See also the sections below:

Cannot Print to End of Job

No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks

Colors Are Unclear

Lines Are Misaligned

Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots

Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched

Back of the Paper Is Smudged

Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout

Colors Are Uneven or Streaked

821
If the Printed Paper Has Been Discolored
Colors may fade with time if the printed paper is left for a long period of time.

After printing, dry the paper sufficiently, avoid high temperatures, high humidity, and direct sunlight, and
store or display indoors at room temperature and normal humidity.
To avoid direct exposure to air, we recommend that you store the paper in an album, plastic folder, photo
frame, etc.

822
Cannot Print to End of Job

Check1 Select the setting not to compress the printing data.

If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing
result may be improved.

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application
software to compress print data check box, then click OK.

* Deselect the check box after printing is complete.

Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large?

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Then, set Prevention of Print Data Loss in
the displayed dialog to On.
* When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss, print quality may be reduced.

Check3 Is the space of your computer's hard disk sufficient?

Delete unnecessary files to free disk space.

823
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White
Streaks
No Printing Results

Printing Is Blurred

Colors Are Wrong

824
 White Streaks

Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance
operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.

• If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:

After performing the Print Head Cleaning, print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
Ink may have run out. Replace the FINE cartridge.

Check3 When a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, replace it with a new one.

Check4 When using paper with one printable surface, make sure that the paper is
loaded with the printable side facing down.
Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality.

Load paper with the printable side facing down.

Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side.

Check5 Is the FINE cartridge installed properly?

If the FINE cartridge is not installed securely, ink may not be ejected correctly.

Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.

825
Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.

When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.

After confirming that the FINE cartridge is installed properly, close the paper output cover.

• When copying, see also the sections below:

Check6 Is the platen glass or the glass of ADF dirty?

Clean the platen glass or the glass of ADF.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.

Check7 Check that the original is loaded correctly on the platen glass or in the ADF.
Loading Originals

Check8 Is the original document is loaded with the proper side facing up/down?
When loading the original on the platen glass, the side to be copied should be face down. When loading the
original in the ADF, the side to be copied should be face up.

Check9 Did you copy a printout done by this machine?

If you use a printout done by this machine as the original, print quality may be reduced depending on the
condition of the original.

Print from the machine directly, or reprint from the computer if you can reprint from it.

826
Colors Are Unclear

Check1 Is the Nozzle Check Pattern printed properly?

Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.

Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.
• If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:

After performing the Print Head Cleaning, print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern.
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:

Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.

If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
Ink may have run out. Replace the FINE cartridge.

Check2 When a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, replace it with a new one.

Check3 Is the FINE cartridge installed properly?

If the FINE cartridge is not installed securely, ink may not be ejected correctly.
Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.
Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.

When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.

After confirming that the FINE cartridge is installed properly, close the paper output cover.

Note
• Printed colors may not match screen colors due to basic differences in the methods used to produce
colors. Color control settings and environmental differences can also affect how colors appear on the
screen. Therefore, colors of printing results may be different from those on the screen.

827
Lines Are Misaligned

Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2 Perform Print Head Alignment.

If printed lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head position.
Aligning the Print Head

Note
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment
manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer.

Check3 Increase the print quality and try printing again.

Increasing the print quality on the operation panel of the machine or in the printer driver may improve the print
result.

828
Line Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Check1 Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin function used?
When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used, thin lines may not be printed. Try
thickening the lines in the document.

Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large?

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Then, set Prevention of Print Data Loss in
the displayed dialog to On.
* When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss, print quality may be reduced.

829
Image Does Not Print or Prints Partially

Check1 Select the setting not to compress the printing data.

If you select the setting not to compress the printing data with an application software you are using, the printing
result may be improved.

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Select the Do not allow application
software to compress print data check box, then click OK.

* Deselect the check box after printing is complete.

Check2 Is the size of the print data extremely large?

Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. Then, set Prevention of Print Data Loss in
the displayed dialog to On.
* When On is selected for Prevention of Print Data Loss, print quality may be reduced.

830
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Printed Paper Has Ink Blots

Printed Paper Curls

Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2 If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become
wavy, causing paper abrasion.

• When printing from your computer

You can confirm the intensity using the printer driver.
Adjusting Intensity

• When copying
Setting Items for Copying

Check3 Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs?

When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color, we recommend
using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper.

Media Types You Can Use

831
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Paper Is Smudged

The Edges of Paper Are Smudged Printed Surface Is Smudged

Printed Surface Is Scratched

Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2 Is the appropriate type of paper used? Check the followings:

• Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose.
Media Types You Can Use

• When performing Borderless Printing, make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for Borderless
Printing.

If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing, the print quality may be reduced at the top
and bottom edges of the paper.

Printing Area

Check3 Load the paper after correcting its curl.

When using Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss, even if the sheet is curled, load one sheet at a time as it is. If you roll
up this paper to flatten, this may cause cracks on the surface of the paper and reduce the print quality.

We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface.

• For Plain Paper

Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side.

832
 • For Other Paper
If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0.1 inch / 3 mm (A) in height, the paper may be
smudged or may not be fed properly. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to correct the
paper curl.

1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below.

2. Check that the paper is now flat.

We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time.

Note
• Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it is not
curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper outward within 0.1
inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing. This may improve the print result.

(C) Printing side

We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time.

Check4 Adjust the setting to prevent paper abrasion.

Adjusting the setting to prevent paper abrasion will widen the clearance between the print head and the loaded
paper. If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded paper, set the machine
to prevent paper abrasion by using the operation panel or the computer.

Print speed may be reduced if you apply the setting to prevent paper abrasion setting.

* Readjust the setting not to prevent paper abrasion once printing is complete. If not, this setting remains
enabled for all subsequent print jobs.

• To set by using the operation panel

Press the Setup button, then select Device settings and Output settings in this order, then set Prevent
abrasion to ON.

Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD

833
 • To set by using your computer
Open the printer driver setup window, and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet, select the
Prevent paper abrasion check box, and then click OK.

To open the printer driver setup window, see How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window.

Check5 If the intensity is set high, reduce the intensity setting and try printing again.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink and become
wavy, causing paper abrasion.
• When printing from your computer

Reduce the intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
1. Open the printer driver setup window.

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

2. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set....

3. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the intensity.

• When copying
Setting Items for Copying

Check6 Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area?

If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper, the lower edge of the paper
may become stained with ink.
Resize your original document in your application software.
Printing Area

Check7 Is the platen glass or the glass of ADF dirty?

Clean the platen glass or the glass of ADF.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.

Check8 Is the paper feed roller dirty?

Clean the paper feed roller.

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller

Note
• Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.

Check9 Is the inside of the machine dirty?

834
When performing duplex printing, the inside of the machine may become stained with ink, causing the printout to
become smudged.
Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.

Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)

Note
• To prevent the inside of the machine from stains, set the paper size correctly.

Check10 Set the time to dry the printed surface longer.

Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are prevented.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.

2. Open the printer driver setup window.

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

3. Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings.

4. Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time, and then click OK.

5. Confirm the message and click OK.

835
Back of the Paper Is Smudged

Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2 Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)

Note
• When performing borderless printing, duplex printing, or too much printing, the inside may become stained
with ink.

836
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout

Check Is the size of the loaded paper correct?

The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that you have
specified.
Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded.
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Note
• The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print setting.
• This machine performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean. A small amount of ink
is ejected for cleaning.
Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber, it may be ejected on the paper if you load paper larger
than that you have specified.

837
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Colors Are Uneven

Colors Are Streaked

Check1 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

Check2 Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary maintenance
operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.

Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.

• If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:

After performing the Print Head Cleaning, print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:

Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.

838
 If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:

Ink may have run out. Replace the FINE cartridge.

Check3 Perform Print Head Alignment.

Aligning the Print Head

Note
• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head Alignment
manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position from Your Computer.

839
Ink Is Not Ejected

Check1 When a FINE cartridge runs out of ink, replace it with a new one.

Check2 Is the FINE cartridge installed properly?

If the FINE cartridge is not installed securely, ink may not be ejected correctly.

Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.

Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.

When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.
After confirming that the FINE cartridge is installed properly, close the paper output cover.

Check3 Are the print head nozzles clogged?

Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Refer to When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head
Cleaning, and Print Head Deep Cleaning.

• If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:

After performing the Print Head Cleaning, print the Nozzle Check Pattern and examine the pattern.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:

Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.

If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the machine and
perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours. When you turn the machine off, do not unplug it
from the power supply.

• If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:

Ink may have run out. Replace the FINE cartridge.

840
Paper Does Not Feed Properly/"No Paper" Error Occurs

Check1 Make sure that paper is loaded.

Loading Paper

Check2 Make sure of the following when you load paper.

• When loading two or more sheets of paper, flip through the paper before loading.

• When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading.
• When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the paper load
limit.
However, proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on the type of
paper or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature and humidity). In such cases, reduce
the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load limit.

• Always load the paper in portrait orientation, regardless of the printing orientation.
• When you load the paper, load the paper with the print side facing DOWN and slide the paper guides to
align with the both sides of the paper.
Loading Paper

• When you load the paper, insert the paper stack until the leading edge touches the far end of the front tray.

Check3 Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or curled.
Media Types You Cannot Use

Check4 Make sure of the following when you load envelopes.

When printing on envelopes, refer to Loading Paper, and prepare the envelopes before printing.

Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed in
landscape orientation, they will not feed properly.

Check5 Is the cassette set properly?

Push the cassette so that the mark on the cassette aligns with the front panel as illustrated below.

841
When the cassette is set properly, you hear an electric sound once.

Check6 Confirm that the media type and the paper size settings correspond with the
loaded paper.

Check7 If multiple sheets of plain paper is fed from the machine, select the setting for
preventing double-feed of plain paper.
If multiple sheets of plain paper is fed from the machine, select the setting for preventing double-feed of plain
paper using the operation panel or your computer.
* After printing is finished, disable the setting for preventing double-feed of plain paper; otherwise, the setting is
applied from the next time.

• To set by using the operation panel

Press the Setup button, select Device settings and Output settings in this order, and then set Prevent
double-feed to ON.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD

• To set by using your computer

Open the printer driver setup window, and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet, select the
Prevent paper double-feed check box, and then click OK.

To open the printer driver setup window, see How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window.

Note
• Printing speed will be reduced if Prevent paper double-feed function is enabled.

Check8 Clean the paper feed roller.

Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller

Note
• Cleaning the paper feed roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when necessary.

842
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed

Check1 Is the paper loaded?

Make sure that paper is loaded.

If the machine has run out of paper, load paper.

Check2 Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or illustrations?

As printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the machine and the computer to process, the
machine may appear to have stopped operating.
In addition, when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper, the machine may
pause temporarily. In either case, wait until the process is complete.

Note
• If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a document, printing
may pause to allow the ink to dry.

Check3 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period?
If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the print head or other parts around it may
overheat. The machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then resume printing.
In this case, wait for a while without operation. If the printing still does not resume, interrupt your print session at
a convenient time and turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes.

Caution
• The print head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the machine. Never touch the
print head or nearby components.

843
Problems with Scanning
Problems with Scanning
Scan Results Not Satisfactory
Software Problems

844
Problems with Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not
Appear
Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time
Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan
Slow Scanning Speed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows
Scanned Image Does Not Open

845
Scanner Does Not Work

Check 1 Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.

Check 2 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.

Check 3 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and
connect it to a USB port on the computer.

Check 4 Restart the computer.

846
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start

Check 1 Make sure that MP Drivers is installed.

If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.

Check 2 Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.

Important
• If your scanner or printer name is displayed multiple times, select the one that does not include WIA.

Note
• The operation may differ depending on the application.
• Use the WIA driver when scanning from a WIA-compliant application.
Scanning with WIA Driver

Check 3 Make sure that the application supports TWAIN.

You cannot start ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.

Check 4 Scan and save images with IJ Scan Utility and open the files in your
application.

847
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen
Does Not Appear

Check 1 Make sure that your scanner or printer is turned on.

Check 2 Turn off your scanner or printer, then reconnect the USB cable and replug the
power cord.

Check 3 Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.

Check 4 If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, remove it from the USB hub and
connect it to a USB port on the computer.

Check 5 Make sure that MP Drivers is installed.

If not installed, install MP Drivers from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.

Check 6 Select your scanner or printer on the application's menu.

Note
• The operation may differ depending on the application.

Check 7 Make sure that the application supports TWAIN.

You cannot start ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.

Check 8 Exit ScanGear if it is running on another application.

848
Cannot Scan Multiple Items at One Time

Check 1 Make sure that the items are placed correctly.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

Check 2 Check if you can properly scan one item.

Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.

849
Cannot Scan Properly with Auto Scan

Check 1 Make sure that the items are placed correctly.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

Check 2 Multiple item scanning may not be supported.

Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.

850
Slow Scanning Speed

Check 1 To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to around 150 dpi. To
print, set it to around 300 dpi.
Resolution

Check 2 Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None.

Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Check 3 In IJ Scan Utility, deselect the Correct slanted text document / Detect the
orientation of text document and rotate image checkbox and scan again.
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box

851
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed

Check 1 Exit other applications and try again.

Check 2 Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.

Resolution

852
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning

Check 1 Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear (scanner
driver) and scan again.
Refer to "Output Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Check 2 Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space, then scan
again.
Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image size is too
large (such as when scanning a large item at high resolution).

Check 3 In Folder to Save Temporary Files of IJ Scan Utility, specify a folder on a

drive with sufficient free space.
Settings (General Settings) Dialog Box

Check 4 Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports.

Disconnect devices other than your scanner or printer.

853
Scanner Does Not Work after Upgrading Windows

Check Disconnect the USB cable, then uninstall (delete) and reinstall MP Drivers and IJ
Scan Utility.

Step 1: Uninstall MP Drivers.

Refer to "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how to
delete MP Drivers.

Step 2: Uninstall IJ Scan Utility.

• Windows 8.1/Windows 8:
1. Click the Settings charm > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.
2. Double-click Canon IJ Scan Utility.
3. When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
4. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
IJ Scan Utility is deleted.

Note
• In Windows 8.1 and Windows 8, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing,
uninstalling, or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.

• Windows 7/Windows Vista:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.
2. Double-click Canon IJ Scan Utility.
3. When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
4. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
IJ Scan Utility is deleted.

Note
• In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing,
uninstalling, or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.

• Windows XP:

1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2. Select Canon IJ Scan Utility, then click Change/Remove.
3. When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
4. When uninstallation is complete, click OK.

IJ Scan Utility is deleted.

854
Step 3: Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility.
Reinstall MP Drivers and IJ Scan Utility from the Setup CD-ROM or the web page.

855
Scanned Image Does Not Open

Check If the data format is not supported by the application, scan the image again and
select a popular data format such as JPEG when saving it.
Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.

856
Scan Results Not Satisfactory
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning
from the Operation Panel
Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor

857
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor

Check 1 If the image is jagged, increase the scanning resolution, or select TIFF or PNG
in Data Format of the Settings dialog box.
Resolution
Settings Dialog Box

Check 2 Set the display size to 100 %.

Some applications do not display images clearly if the display size is too small.

Check 3 If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and scan again.
• Set one of the following settings in the Settings (Document Scan) dialog box, Settings (Custom Scan)
dialog box, or Settings (Scan and Stitch) dialog box of IJ Scan Utility, then scan from the IJ Scan Utility
main screen.

◦ Set Select Source to Magazine and set Color Mode to Color

◦ Select the Reduce moire checkbox in Image Processing Settings
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Scan and Stitch) Dialog Box

• On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine (Color) in Select Source.
Refer to "Basic Mode Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Descreen in Image Settings to ON.
Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Note
• If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again.

Check 4 Check the monitor's color depth.

Refer to Help of Windows or the monitor's manual for details on how to check the monitor's color depth.

Check 5 Clean the platen and document cover.

Check 6 If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), then set Reduce Dust
and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in Image Settings on the
Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear.
Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

Check 7 If the color tone of images is different from the original document, take the
following measures and scan again.

858
• On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear, set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to None.
Refer to "Image Settings" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

• On the Color Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box of ScanGear, set Color Matching.
Refer to "Color Settings Tab" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for details.

859
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas

Check Specify the scan area.

Click (Auto Crop) in whole image view of ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping
frame (scan area) according to the item size.

You can also manually specify the scan area in thumbnail view or when there are white margins along the item
(for example, in photos), or when you want to create custom cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames in the Image Stitch Window

Note
• Refer to "Adjusting Cropping Frames (ScanGear)" for your model from Home of the Online Manual for how
to adjust cropping frames with ScanGear (scanner driver).

860
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size

Check Make sure that the items are placed correctly.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

861
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When
Scanning from the Operation Panel

Check 1 Make sure that the items are placed correctly.

Placing Items (When Scanning from a Computer)

Check 2 Check that the settings match the item to be scanned.

If you cannot scan properly by automatically detecting the item type, specify the item type and size.

When Scanning from the Operation Panel:

Refer to "Setting Items for Scanning Using the Operation Panel of the Machine" for your model from Home of the
Online Manual for details on the setting items when scanning from the operation panel.

When Scanning with IJ Scan Utility:

Scanning Documents
Scanning Photos
Scanning with Favorite Settings

862
Item Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted

Check When Document or Magazine is selected for Select Source, deselect the
Correct slanted text document checkbox and scan the item again.
Settings (Document Scan) Dialog Box
Settings (Custom Scan) Dialog Box

863
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor

Check 1 Change the display setting in the application.

Refer to the application's manual for details. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.

Note
• You cannot reduce the image size in Paint. To reduce the display size, open the images in an application.

Check 2 Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and scan again.
The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.
Resolution

864
Software Problems
The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting
an E-mail Client

865
The E-mail Client You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen
for Selecting an E-mail Client

Check Check that the e-mail client's MAPI is enabled.

Refer to the e-mail client's manual for how to set MAPI.

If the problem is not solved even when MAPI is enabled, select None (Attach Manually) in the screen for
selecting an e-mail client, then manually attach the image to the outgoing e-mail.

866
Problems with Faxing
Problems Sending Faxes
Problems Receiving Faxes
Cannot Send a Fax Clearly
Telephone Problems

867
Problems Sending Faxes
Cannot Send a Fax
Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot Dial by
Entering the Numbers
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax

868
Cannot Send a Fax

Check1 Is the power turned on?

• You cannot send faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
• If you unplugged the power cord without turning off the power (the POWER lamp is lit), reconnecting it turns
on the power automatically.
• If you unplugged the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (the POWER lamp is
off), reconnect it, then press the ON button to turn on the power.
• If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power
failure is resolved.

Important
• Confirm that the POWER lamp is off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.

Note
• If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed after
turning the machine on.
For details, see Summary of Reports and Lists.

Check2 Is the document being sent from memory or the fax being received into
memory?
When the message for the transmission/reception is displayed on the LCD, a fax is being sent from/received into
machine's memory. Wait until the transmission/reception is complete.

Check3 Is the machine's memory full?

Delete contents in memory, then send a fax again.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

Check4 Is the telephone line type set correctly?

Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.

Setting the Telephone Line Type

Check5 Is Hook setting set to Disable?

When you send a fax manually, dial the number with Enable selected for Hook setting in Security control
under Fax settings, or dial the number using the telephone connected to the machine.

869
 Security control

Check6 Is Dial tone detect set to ON?

Resend the fax after a while.
If you still cannot send the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.

Adv. FAX settings

Check7 Is the fax number registered correctly in the machine's directory?

Check the recipient's fax/telephone number, correct the fax/telephone number registered in the machine's
directory, then send the document again.

Changing Registered Information

Note
• You can check the registered information in the machine's directory by printing RECIPIENT TELEPHONE
NUMBER LIST.
Summary of Reports and Lists

Check8 Does an error occur during transmission?

• Ensure that a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen. When a message is displayed on the Fax
standby screen, check the cause.
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen

• Print ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error.

Summary of Reports and Lists

Check9 Is the document loaded properly?

Remove the document, then reload it on the platen glass or in the ADF.
Loading Originals

Check10 Does a printer error occur?

Ensure that an error message is displayed on the LCD. When an error message is displayed on the LCD, check
the cause.

When the error message with the support code is displayed, refer to List of Support Code for Error.

When the error message without the support code is displayed, refer to A Message Is Displayed.

If you are in a hurry, press the Stop button to close the message, then send the fax.

Check11 Is the telephone line connected correctly?

Reconnect the telephone line cable to the telephone line jack.

Basic Connection

If the telephone line is connected correctly, there is a problem with your telephone line. Contact your telephone
company and the manufacturer of your terminal adapter or telephone adapter.

870
Cannot Perform Sequential Broadcasting by Redialing, or Cannot
Dial by Entering the Numbers

Check Have you already selected the recipient from the redial history, or already dialed
a number by entering the fax/telephone numbers?
You can dial one recipient by selecting from the redial history or by entering the fax/telephone numbers as the
recipient of sequential broadcasting.

If you already have dialed by selecting from the redial history or by entering the fax/telephone numbers, select
the recipient from the machine's directory.

871
Errors Often Occur When You Send a Fax

Check Check the telephone line condition or the connection.

If the telephone line or connection is poor, reducing the transmission start speed may correct the error.

Reduce the transmission start speed on TX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings.
Adv. FAX settings

872
Problems Receiving Faxes
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax
Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax Calls
Quality of Received Fax is Poor
Cannot Receive a Color Fax
Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax

873
Cannot Receive a Fax, Cannot Print a Fax

Check1 Is the power turned on?

• You cannot receive faxes if the power is turned off. Press the ON button to turn the power on.
• If you unplugged the power cord without turning off the power (the POWER lamp is lit), reconnecting it turns
on the power automatically.
• If you unplugged the power cord after pressing the ON button to turn off the power (the POWER lamp is
off), reconnect it, then press the ON button to turn on the power.
• If the power was turned off due to power failure, etc., the power is automatically turned on when the power
failure is resolved.

Important
• Confirm that the POWER lamp is off before unplugging the power cord, then unplug the power cord.
If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory are
deleted.
For details on how to unplug the power cord, refer to Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.

Note
• If the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted by a power failure or unplugging the power cord,
the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY CLEAR REPORT) will be printed after
turning the machine on.
For details, see Summary of Reports and Lists.

Check2 Is the machine's memory full?

Print the received faxes stored in the machine's memory, delete them from the machine's memory, and have the
sender resend the faxes.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

Check3 Does an error occur during reception?

• Ensure that a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen. When a message is displayed on the Fax
standby screen, check the cause.

A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen

• Print ACTIVITY REPORT and check for an error.

Summary of Reports and Lists

Check4 Is the telephone line cable connected to the external device jack?
Reconnect it to the telephone line jack.

Basic Connection

874
 Check5 Is a different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper
settings loaded?
If a different size of paper from that specified by Page size is loaded for printing faxes, the received faxes will not
be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory (Memory Reception). Load the same size of paper as that
specified by Page size, then press the OK button on the machine.

Check6 Is paper loaded?

If paper is not loaded, received faxes will be stored in the machine's memory without being printed (Memory
Reception). Load paper, then press the OK button.

Check7 Is the amount of remaining ink sufficient to print a fax?

If the amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print, received faxes will be stored in the machine's memory
without being printed (Memory Reception). Replace the FINE cartridge, then print the faxes in the machine's
memory.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

Note
• If the machine was receiving faxes in the fax mode, printing will start automatically after the FINE cartridge
is replaced.
Replacing a FINE Cartridge

• You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out.
Set Print when no ink in Auto print settings under Fax settings to Print.
However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.
Also, the contents of the fax will not be stored in the machine's memory.
If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received documents in
Auto print settings under Fax settings to store the received fax in the machine's memory. After you
replace the FINE cartridge and select Print for Received documents in Auto print settings, the fax
stored in the machine's memory will be printed automatically.

Auto print settings

Check8 Is the machine set to the appropriate receive mode?

Check the receive mode setting and change it to a mode suited to your connection if necessary.

Setting the Receive Mode

Check9 Is FAX RX reject set to ON?

Select OFF for FAX RX reject in Security control under Fax settings.

For details on how to set, see Rejecting Fax Reception.

Check10 Are there setting items set Reject in Caller rejection?

If you select Reject for any setting items in Caller rejection in Security control under Fax settings, the
machine rejects calls for setting item selected Reject.

For details on how to set, see Using the Caller ID Service to Reject Calls.

875
Machine Does Not Switch Automatically between Voice and Fax
Calls

Check Is the receive mode set to Fax only mode?

If Fax only mode is selected for Receive mode set. under FAX menu, there will be no automatic switching
between voice and fax calls.

Set the receive mode to TEL priority mode, DRPD*1, or Network switch*2.

If the receive mode is TEL priority mode and an answering machine is connected to the machine, check
whether a proper message is played back when the answering machine answers.

Setting the Receive Mode

*1 This setting is available only in the US and Canada.

*2 This setting may not be available depending on the country or region of purchase.

876
Quality of Received Fax is Poor

Check1 Check the scan settings of the sender's fax machine.

Ask the sender to adjust the scan settings of the fax machine.

Check2 Is ECM RX set to OFF?

Select ON for ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
If ECM RX is enabled, the sender's fax machine resends the fax after correcting errors automatically.

Adv. FAX settings

Check3 Is the sender's original document or scanning area of the sender's fax machine
dirty?
The image quality of the fax is mainly determined by the sender's fax machine. Contact the sender and ask the
sender to check whether the scanning area of the fax machine is dirty.

Check4 Is ECM transmission/reception enabled although the line/connection is poor, or

is the sender's fax machine compatible with ECM?
• Select ON for ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.
Adv. FAX settings

• Contact the sender and ask the sender to check whether the machine is set to enable ECM transmission.
If the sender's or recipient's fax machine is not compatible with ECM, the fax will be sent/received without
automatic error correction.

• Reduce the reception start speed on RX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under
Fax settings.

Adv. FAX settings

Check5 Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory

877
Cannot Receive a Color Fax

Check Is ECM RX set to OFF?

If OFF is select for ECM RX in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings, the machine
cannot receive color faxes. The machine will disconnect the telephone line or receive color faxes in black & white
according to the setting of the sender's fax machine.

Set ECM RX to ON.

Adv. FAX settings

878
Errors Often Occur When You Receive a Fax

Check1 Check the telephone line condition or the connection.

If the telephone line or connection is poor, reducing the reception start speed may correct the error.

Reduce the reception start speed on RX start speed in Adv. communication in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings.
Adv. FAX settings

Check2 Is the sender's fax machine operating normally?

Contact the sender and ask the sender to check whether the fax machine is operating normally.

879
Cannot Send a Fax Clearly

Check1 Is the document loaded correctly?

Remove the document, then reload it on the platen glass or in the ADF.

Loading Originals

Check2 Is the platen glass and/or the inner side of the document cover and/or the glass
of ADF dirty?
Clean the platen glass and/or the inner side of the document cover and/or the glass of ADF, then reload the
document.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover

Note
• If the glass of ADF is dirty, black streaks appear on the paper as shown below.

Check3 Is the image quality setting or the scan contrast setting suitable for the
document?
On the LCD, select an image quality setting and a scan contrast setting that are suitable for the document.
Setting Items for Sending Faxes

Check4Is the original document loaded with the wrong side facing upwards or
downwards?
When loading a document on the platen glass, the side to be scanned should be face down.

When loading a document in the ADF, the side to be scanned should be face up.

Check5 Are you scanning thick or curled documents?

Thick or curled documents may not be sent as good quality faxes, because of a shadow or distortion caused
when such documents are scanned.

When loading a document on the platen glass, press on the document cover with your hand when scanning.

880
Telephone Problems
Cannot Dial
Telephone Disconnects During a Call

881
Cannot Dial

Check1 Is the telephone line cable connected correctly?

Check that the telephone line cable is connected correctly.

Basic Connection

Check2 Is the telephone line type of the machine or the external device set correctly?
Check the telephone line type setting and change it as necessary.
Setting the Telephone Line Type

882
Telephone Disconnects During a Call

Check Is the telephone line cable or the telephone (or a peripheral device such as an
external telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem) connected correctly?
Check that the telephone line cable and the telephone (or a peripheral device such as an external telephone, an
answering machine, or a computer modem) are connected correctly.

Connecting the Telephone Line

883
Problems with the Machine
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed

884
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On

Check1 Press the ON button.

Check2 Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the power cord
connector of the machine, then turn it back on.

Check3 Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the machine back in and
turn the machine back on after leaving it for at least 3 minutes.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

885
The Machine Turns Off Unintentionally

Check Disable the setting to turn the unit off automatically.

The machine turns off automatically according to the elapsed time you specified if the setting to turn the unit off
automatically is enabled.

If you do not want the machine to turn off automatically, open the printer driver setup window and in Auto Power
under the Maintenance sheet, select Disable for Auto Power Off.

Note
• You can also enable the machine to turn off automatically from the operation panel of the machine or
ScanGear (scanner driver).
• From the operation panel of the machine:
Auto power off

• From ScanGear (scanner driver):

Scanner Tab

886
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly

Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does

Not Work/"This device can perform faster" Message Is Displayed

If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at a lower
speed provided under USB 1.1. In this case, the machine operates properly but printing or scanning
speed may slow down due to communication speed.

Check Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Hi-
Speed USB connection.
• Does the USB port on your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?

• Does the USB cable or the USB hub support Hi-Speed USB connection?

Be sure to use a certified Hi-Speed USB cable. We recommend that the cable is no longer than around
10 feet / 3 meters.

• Does the operating system of your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Obtain and install the latest update for your computer.

• Does the Hi-Speed USB driver operate properly?

Obtain the latest version of the Hi-Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware and reinstall it on
your computer.

Important
• For details on Hi-Speed USB of your system environment, contact the manufacturer of your computer,
USB cable, or USB hub.

887
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection

Check1 Make sure that the machine is turned on.

Check2 Make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.

See Connecting the Machine to the Computer Using a USB Cable to connect the USB cable properly.

Check3 Do not start up IJ Network Tool while printing.

Check4 Do not print while IJ Network Tool is running.

Check5 Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports sheet of
the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

888
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All

• If the POWER lamp is off:

The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and press the ON button.

• If the POWER lamp is lit:

The LCD may be in the screen-saver mode. Press a button other than the ON button on the operation
panel.

889
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD

Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure.

1. Press the Setup button, then wait for about 5 seconds.

2. Press the button twice, then press the OK button.

3. Press the button twice, then press the OK button.

4. Press the button repeatedly to display the rightmost menu.

5. Press the button 3 times, then press the OK button.

6. Use the button to select the language for the LCD, then press the OK button.
The desired language is displayed on the LCD.

7. Press the Stop button.

890
FINE Cartridge Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing

Check1 Is the POWER lamp off?

Check if the POWER lamp is lit.

The FINE cartridge holder will not move unless the power is on. If the POWER lamp is off, close the paper output
cover and turn the machine on.

Check2 Is the Alarm lamp flashing?

Close the paper output cover, confirm the number of times the Alarm lamp is flashing, take the appropriate
action to resolve the error, and then reopen it. For details on how to resolve the error, see List of Support Code
for Error.

Check3 Has the paper output cover been left open for 10 minutes or longer?
If the paper output cover is left open for more than 10 minutes, the FINE cartridge holder moves to the position to
protect it to prevent the print head from drying out. Close and reopen the paper output cover to return the FINE
cartridge holder to the position for replacing.

Check4 Has the machine been printing continuously for a long period?
If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the FINE cartridge holder may not move to the
position for replacing since the print head may overheat.

Note
• Do not open the paper output cover while printing is in progress; otherwise, an error occurs

891
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed

Check Is the printer status monitor enabled?

Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status monitor.
1. Open the printer driver setup window.

How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window

2. On the Maintenance sheet, click View Printer Status.

3. Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected.

892
Problems with Installation/Downloading
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu Does Not
Appear
How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment
Uninstalling IJ Network Tool

893
Cannot Install the MP Drivers

• If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted into your computer's
disc drive:

Start the installation following the procedure below.

1. Select items as shown below.

◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select the Explorer icon in Taskbar on Desktop, then select
Computer from the list on the left.

◦ In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Start then Computer.

◦ In Windows Vista, click Start then Computer.

◦ In Windows XP, click Start then My Computer.

2. Double-click the CD-ROM icon on the displayed window.

If the contents of the CD-ROM are displayed, double-click MSETUP4.EXE.

If you cannot install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM, install them from our website.

Note
• If the CD-ROM icon is not displayed, try the following:

• Remove the CD-ROM from your computer, then insert it again.

• Restart your computer.

If the icon is not yet displayed, try different discs and see if they are displayed. If other discs are
displayed, there is a problem with the Setup CD-ROM. In this case, contact the service center.

894
• If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen:

Note
• The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed depending on the
computer you use.

Check1 Make sure that the USB cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the
computer.

Check2 Follow the procedure below to connect the machine and the computer
again.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Unplug the USB cable from the machine and the computer, then connect it again.
3. Turn the machine on.

Check3 If you cannot resolve the problem, follow the procedure below to reinstall the
MP Drivers.
1. Click Cancel.

2. Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen.

3. Click Exit on the "PIXMA XXX" screen (where "XXX" is your machine's name), then remove the CD-
ROM.

4. Turn the machine off.

5. Restart the computer.

6. Make sure that you have no application software running.

7. Insert the CD-ROM again, then install the MP Drivers.

895
• In other cases:

Reinstall the MP Drivers.

If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, restart your computer, and then
reinstall the MP Drivers.

Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers

If you reinstall the MP Drivers, install the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our
website.

Note
• If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error, the system may be in an
unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers. Restart your computer before
reinstalling.

896
Easy-WebPrint EX Does Not Start Up or Easy-WebPrint EX Menu
Does Not Appear

If Easy-WebPrint EX does not start up or its menu does not appear on Internet Explorer, confirm the
following.

Check1 Is Canon Easy-WebPrint EX displayed on the Toolbars menu in the Internet

Explorer's View menu?
If Canon Easy-WebPrint EX is not displayed, Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer. Install the
latest Easy-WebPrint EX onto your computer from our website.

Note
• If Easy-WebPrint EX is not installed on your computer, a message asking you to install it may be displayed
on the notification area on the desktop. Click the message, then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to install Easy-WebPrint EX.

• While the installation or download Easy-WebPrint EX is in progress, it is necessary to access the Internet.

Check2 Is Canon Easy-WebPrint EX selected on the Toolbars menu in the Internet

Explorer's View menu?
If Canon Easy-WebPrint EX is not selected, Easy-WebPrint EX is disabled. Select Canon Easy-WebPrint EX
to enable it.

Check3 Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports Easy-
WebPrint EX.
• Is it installed on the computer with proper system requirements?
• Did you start it using a compatible version of Internet Explorer?

Visit our website to confirm the details on the system requirements of Easy-WebPrint EX.

897
How to Update MP Drivers in Network Environment

Download the latest MP Drivers in advance.

To obtain the latest MP Drivers, access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP
Drivers for your model.

After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure. When the
connection method selection screen is displayed, select Use the printer with wireless LAN connection
according to the connection method you use. The machine will be detected automatically in the network.
After making sure that the machine is detected, install the MP Drivers following the on-screen instructions.

Note
• You can use the machine over a LAN without performing setup again.

898
Uninstalling IJ Network Tool

Follow the procedure below to uninstall IJ Network Tool from your computer.

Important
• Even if IJ Network Tool is uninstalled, you can print and fax over network or scan from the computer.
However, you cannot change the network settings over network.

• Log into a user account with administrator privilege.

1. Perform the procedure to uninstall IJ Network Tool.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8:

1. Select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop > Programs > Programs and
Features.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Uninstall.

If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• In Windows 7 or Windows Vista:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Uninstall.

If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.

• In Windows XP:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

2. Select Canon IJ Network Tool from the program list, then click Remove.

2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.

When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click OK to restart your
computer.

899
About Errors/Messages Displayed
If an Error Occurs
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen
A Message Is Displayed

900
If an Error Occurs
When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a troubleshooting
message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the message.

When an error occurs, a Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer screen or the LCD.

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the computer screen:

• When a Support Code and a message are displayed on the LCD:

Note
• You can confirm the actions against errors with Support Codes on your computer by searching a
Support Code.

Click Here to Search

For details on how to resolve errors without Support Codes, see A Message Is Displayed.

901
A Message for Faxing Is Displayed on the Fax Standby Screen

If a message is displayed on the Fax standby screen, take the corresponding action described below.

Message Action

Auto redial The machine is waiting to redial the recipient's number because the line was busy or the recipient did
not answer when you tried to send a document. Wait for the machine to automatically redial the
number. If you want to cancel automatic redialing, wait until the machine starts dialing the number, then
press the Stop button. You can also delete the document from machine's memory to cancel automatic
redialing.

Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number)

Hang up The handset is not placed in the handset cradle correctly.

phone Replace the handset correctly.

Try again in The recipient's fax machine is not color-compatible.

B&W Press the Black button to resend the fax.

Alternatively, you select If incompat., B&W for Color transmission in Adv. FAX settings under Fax
settings. The machine converts color documents into black & white data if the recipient's fax machine
does not support color faxing.
Adv. FAX settings

No tone The telephone line cable with a modular plug may not be plugged in properly.
detected Make sure that the cable is plugged in properly, and resend the fax after a while. If you still cannot send
the fax, select OFF for Dial tone detect in Adv. FAX settings under Fax settings.

Adv. FAX settings

Received in If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, the machine will not be able to print
memory the received fax and will store it in the machine's memory. When the problem is resolved as described,
the fax stored in the machine's memory is printed automatically.

• The amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print a fax:

Replace the FINE cartridge.

Replacing a FINE Cartridge

Note
• You can set the machine to forcibly print a received fax even if the ink has run out.

Set Print when no ink in Auto print settings under Fax settings to Print.

However, part or all of the fax may not be printed since the ink has run out.

Also, the contents of the fax will not be stored in the machine's memory.

If the ink has already run out, we recommend that Do not print be selected for Received
documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings to store the received fax in the
machine's memory. After you replace the FINE cartridge and select Print for Received
documents in Auto print settings, the fax stored in the machine's memory will be printed
automatically.

902
 Auto print settings

• Paper has run out:

Load the paper and press the OK button.

• A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:
Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.

• You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a fax:

Press the FAX button to resume printing of the fax.

• Do not print is selected for Received documents in Auto print settings under Fax settings:

You can print the faxes stored in the machine's memory from the Memory reference screen under
FAX menu.

Printing a Document in Machine's Memory

Note
• To print the received faxes automatically, select Print for Received documents in Auto print
settings under Fax settings.

Auto print settings

• If you did not print the fax stored in the machine's memory (e.g., if you did not resolve the problem
by pressing the Stop button), you can delete or print the fax stored in the machine's memory later.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

Busy/no • The recipient's number you dialed is busy.

signal Try dialing again after waiting for a moment.

Resending Faxes (Redialing a Busy Number)

• The fax/telephone number dialed is incorrect.

Check the fax/telephone number and dial again.

• The recipient's fax machine did not respond (after all automatic redialing attempts).

Contact the recipient and have the recipient check the fax machine. For an overseas call, add
pauses to the registered number.

• The recipient is not using a G3 machine.

The machine cannot send or receive documents to/from a fax machine that is incompatible with the
G3 standard. Contact the recipient and ask the recipient to check whether the fax machine is G3
compatible.

• The touch tone/rotary pulse setting on the machine is incorrect.

Set the machine to match the telephone line you are using.

Setting the Telephone Line Type

Memory is The machine's memory is full because it has sent/received too many documents, or a detailed
full document.

Print the faxes stored in the machine's memory and delete them from the machine's memory.

Document Stored in Machine's Memory

When sending a fax, resend it. If this message still appears, delete the faxes stored in the machine's
memory, divide the faxes for sending, and send them again.

When receiving a fax, have the sender resend the faxes.

903
FAX info Transmission has been canceled because the machine could not detect the recipient's fax machine
does not information or the information did not match the dialed number. This message is displayed when
match Check RX FAX info in Security control under Fax settings is set to ON.

For details, see Sending Faxes after Checking Information (Checking the Recipient's Information).

Reception Reception has been rejected because the fax matches the fax rejection condition specified by FAX RX
rejected reject in Security control under Fax settings.

For details, see Rejecting Fax Reception.

Waiting for If the machine receives a fax under one of the following conditions, the machine will not be able to print
report the reports. When the problem is resolved as described, the reports are printed automatically.

• The amount of remaining ink is insufficient to print a report:

Replace the FINE cartridge.

Replacing a FINE Cartridge

• Paper has run out:

Load the paper and press the OK button.

• A different size of paper from that specified by Page size in FAX paper settings is loaded:

Load the same size of paper as that specified by Page size, then press the OK button.

• You pressed the Stop button to cancel printing of a report:

Press the FAX button to resume printing of the report.

904
A Message Is Displayed
This section describes some of the errors or messages.

Note
• A Support Code (error number) is displayed on the computer or on the LCD for some error or message.
For details on errors with Support Codes, refer to List of Support Code for Error.

If a message is displayed on the LCD, see below.

• A Message Is Displayed on the LCD

If a message is displayed on the computer, see below.

• Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed

• Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error

• Other Error Messages

• The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed

A Message Is Displayed on the LCD

Confirm the message and take an appropriate action.

• Check page size Press [OK]

The size of the loaded paper is different from that specified in the paper size setting.

Load the same size of paper as that specified in the paper size setting, then press the OK button.

• Data error Press [OK]

A power failure has occurred or the power cord has been unplugged when the faxes are stored in the
machine's memory.

Important
• If a power failure occurs or you unplug the power cord, all faxes stored in the machine's memory
are deleted.

• For details on how to unplug the power cord, see Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord.

Press the OK button.

After pressing the OK button, the list of the faxes deleted from the machine's memory (MEMORY
CLEAR REPORT) will be printed.

For details, refer to Summary of Reports and Lists.

• Cannot connect to the server; try again

You cannot connect to the server due to some communication error.

Press the OK button to dismiss the error, then try again after a while.

905
 Error Regarding the Power Cord Being Unplugged Is Displayed

The power cord may have been unplugged while the machine was still on.

Check the error message that appears on the computer, then click OK.

The machine starts printing.

See Notice for Unplugging the Power Cord for unplugging the power cord.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error

Check1 If the POWER lamp is off, make sure that the power plug is plugged in, then
turn the machine on.
While the POWER lamp is flashing, the machine is initializing. Wait until the POWER lamp stops flashing and
remains lit.

Check2 Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver.
* In the following instructions, "XXX" signifies your machine's name.

1. Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.

2. Select items as shown below.
• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >
Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers.

• In Windows 7, select Devices and Printers from the Start menu.

• In Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

• In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers
and Faxes.

3. Open the properties of printer driver for the machine.

• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, or Windows 7, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where
"XXX" is your machine's name), then select Printer properties.

• In Windows Vista or Windows XP, right-click the "Canon XXX series Printer" icon (where "XXX" is
your machine's name), then select Properties.

4. Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings.

Make sure that a port named "USBnnn" (where "n" is a number) with "Canon XXX series Printer"
appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).

906
 Note
• When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as
"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx". "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a
character string specified by the user when setting up the machine.

• If the setting is incorrect:

Reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from our website.
• Printing does not start even though the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable
and the port named "USBnnn" is selected:
In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select My Printer on the Start screen to start My Printer. If My
Printer is not displayed on the Start screen, select the Search charm, then search for "My Printer".
Set the correct printer port on Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow the on-screen instructions to
set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.
In Windows 7, Windows Vista, or Windows XP, click Start and select All programs, Canon
Utilities, Canon My Printer, Canon My Printer, then select Diagnose and Repair Printer. Follow
the on-screen instructions to set the correct printer port, then select your machine's name.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from
our website.

• Printing does not start even though the port named "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" is selected when the
machine is used over LAN:
Launch IJ Network Tool, and select "CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx" as you confirmed in step 4, then
associate the port with the printer using Associate Port in the Settings menu.
If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or install them from
our website.

Check3 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable is securely
plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:

• If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to the
computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay device.
Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.

• There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing again.

When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over network correctly.

Check4 Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed correctly.

Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers, then
reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or reinstall them from our website.

Check5 When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, check
the status of the device on your computer.
Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device.

1. Open the Device Manager on your computer as shown below.

If the User Account Control screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

• In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >
Hardware and Sound > Device Manager.

907
 • In Windows 7 or Windows Vista, click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Device Manager.

• In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, System, then click Device
Manager on the Hardware sheet.

2. Double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support.

If the USB Printing Support Properties screen is not displayed, make sure that the machine is correctly
connected to the computer.
Check3 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
3. Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the device.

If a device error is displayed, refer to Windows help to resolve the error.

Other Error Messages

Check If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor, check the
following:
• "Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space"
Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk.

• "Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory"

Quit other running application softwares to increase available memory.
If you cannot print yet, restart your computer and retry printing.

• "Printer driver could not be found"

Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers, then
reinstall the MP Drivers with the Setup CD-ROM or reinstall them from our website.

• "Could not print Application name - File name"

Try printing again once the current job is complete.

The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is

Displayed

If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, a confirmation screen asking for
permission to send the printer and application software usage information will be displayed every month
for about ten years.

Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below.

908
• If you agree to participate in the survey program:

Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent via the
Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent automatically
from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed again.

Note
• When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen may be
displayed. In this case, confirm that the program name is "IJPLMUI.exe", then allow it.

• If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will not
be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be displayed at
the time of the next survey. To send the information automatically, see Changing the confirmation
screen setting:.

• If you do not agree to participate in the survey program:

Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen will be closed, and the survey at that time is skipped.
The confirmation screen will be displayed again one month later.

• To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program:

To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program, click Uninstall, then follow the
on-screen instructions.

• Changing the confirmation screen setting:

1. Select items as shown below.

◦ In Windows 8.1 or Windows 8, select Control Panel from the Settings charm on Desktop >
Programs > Programs and Features.

◦ In Windows 7, or Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Programs >
Programs and Features.

◦ In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.

909
 Note
• In Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning
dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling or starting up software.

This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.

If you are logged on to an administrator account, follow the on-screen instructions.

2. Select Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.

3. Select Change.

If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation screen will
be displayed at the time of the next survey.

If you select No, the information will be sent automatically.

Note
• If you select Uninstall (or Remove in Windows XP), the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax
Extended Survey Program is uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.

910
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of
the machine or the service center.

Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers.

Caution
• If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately. Unplug the power cord
from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the
machine yourself.

• Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of
whether the warranty has expired.

Before contacting the service center, confirm the following:

• Product name:

* Your machine's name is located on the front cover of the setup manual.
• Serial number: please refer to the setup manual

• Details of the problem

• What you tried to solve the problem, and what happened

911
List of Support Code for Error
The support code appears on the LCD and the computer screen when an error occurs.

"Support Code" means the error number and appears with an error message.

When an error occurs, check the support code displayed on the LCD or the computer screen and take the
appropriate action.

Support Code Appears on the LCD and the Computer Screen

• 1000 to 1ZZZ

1003 1200 1203 1250 1300 1303

1401 1403 1485 1682 1684 1686

1688 168A 1702 1703 1704 1705

1712 1713 1714 1715 1871 1890

• 2000 to 2ZZZ

2110 2120 2700 2801 2802 2803

2900 2901

• 4000 to 4ZZZ

4100 4103

• 5000 to 5ZZZ

5011 5012 5040 5100 5200 5400

5B02 5B03 5B04 5B05 5B12 5B13

5B14 5B15

• 6000 to 6ZZZ

6000 6500 6800 6801 6900 6901

6902 6910 6911 6930 6931 6932

6933 6936 6937 6938 6939 693A

6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 6945

6946

• 9000 to 9ZZZ

9500

912
 • A000 to ZZZZ

B201 B202 B203 B204

About the support code for paper jam, you can also refer to List of Support Code for Error (When Paper Is
Jammed).

913
List of Support Code for Error (When Paper Is Jammed)
If the paper is jammed, remove it following the procedure appropriate for each case.

• If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

1300

• If you cannot see the jammed paper at the paper output slot:

1303

• If the paper tears and you cannot remove it from the paper output slot or from the transport unit:

Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine

• If the document is jammed in the ADF:

2801

• Cases other than above:

In Other Cases

914
1300

Cause
Paper is jammed in the paper output slot.

Action
If you can see the jammed paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper following the procedure
below.

Important
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.

Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.

If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

1. Pull the paper out slowly.

Hold the paper with your hands, then pull the paper out slowly not to tear it.

Note
• If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be
ejected automatically.

• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop
button to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.
• If you cannot pull the paper out from the paper output slot, try to pull the paper out from the
transport unit.

1303
• If the paper tears and you cannot remove the jammed paper from the paper output slot, remove
the paper from inside the machine.

Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine

2. Reload the paper, and press the machine's OK button.

The printer resumes printing. Reprint the page you were printing if it was not printed properly due to
the paper jam.

915
 If you turned off the machine in step 1, all print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.

Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure that you are using suitable paper for printing and are
loading it correctly.
• We recommend you use paper other than A5 sized one to print documents with photos or
graphics; otherwise, the printout may curl and cause paper exit jams.

If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.

916
1303

Cause
Paper is jammed inside the machine at the transport unit.

Action
If you cannot see the paper at the paper output slot, remove the paper from the transport unit.

Remove the paper following the procedure below.

Important
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.

Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.

If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

Note
• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop button to
cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.

1. Turn the machine off, then unplug the power cord.

2. Open the document cover.

Close the document tray if it is open.

3. Stand the machine with the right side facing down.

Important
• Stand the machine on a wide and flat surface such as a desk.
• When you stand the machine, hold it securely and be careful not to hit it on a hard object.

4. Open the transport unit.

When you open the transport unit, support the machine with your hand so that it does not fall down.

917
 5. Pull out the jammed paper slowly.
When you pull the jammed paper, support the machine with your hand so that it does not fall down.

Note
• If the paper is rolled up and it is difficult to remove, grasp the edges of the paper, then remove
the jammed paper.

• If you cannot remove the jammed paper from the transport unit, close the transport unit, take
back the machine in original position, then remove the paper from inside the machine.
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine

6. Close the transport unit.

Note
• After you close the transport unit, take back the machine in original position at once.

7. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

8. Reload the paper.

All print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.

If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.

918
2801

Cause
The document is jammed in the ADF.

Action
Remove the document following the procedure below.

Important
• Do not open the document cover if the document is jammed. The jammed document may be torn.

• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.

Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.

If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

• If the original remains in the ADF by pressing the Stop button while the machine is scanning
the document:

If you press the Stop button during scanning then the document remained in the ADF, the message
about the paper remained in the ADF appears on the LCD. Press the OK button so that the remaining
document is automatically fed out.

• If the original is jammed in the ADF:

Remove the document following the procedure below.

1. If printing is in progress, press the Stop button.

2. Turn off the machine.

3. Open the document feeder cover slowly.

If a multi-page document is loaded, open the document feeder cover after removing any pages
other than the jammed page from the ADF.

4. Pull out the jammed document from the ADF.

919
 5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.

If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.

Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.

In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.

If the document still jams, use the platen glass instead.

• If the original is jammed in the ADF (from the paper feed side):

Remove the document following the procedure below.

1. If printing is in progress, press the Stop button.

2. Turn off the machine.

3. Close the document tray, then open the document feeder cover slowly.

4. Pull out the jammed document from the ADF.

920
 5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.

Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.

In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.

If the document still jams, use the platen glass instead.

921
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine
If the jammed paper tears and you cannot remove the paper either from the paper output slot or from the
transport unit, or if the jammed paper remains inside the machine, remove the paper following the procedure
below.

Important
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.
Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do not
unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.

If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

Note
• If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop button to
cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.

1. Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

2. Open the paper output cover.

Remove the paper in the cassette if any.

Important
• Do not touch the clear film (A).

If the paper or your hands touch the clear film and blot or scratch it, the machine can be damaged.

3. Make sure that the jammed paper is not under the FINE cartridge holder.

922
 If the jammed paper is under the FINE cartridge holder, move the FINE cartridge holder to the right edge
or the left edge whichever is easier to remove the paper.

When you move the FINE cartridge holder, hold the FINE cartridge holder and slide it slowly to the right
edge or the left edge.

4. Hold the jammed paper with your hands.

If the paper is rolled up, pull it out.

5. Pull the paper slowly not to tear it, then pull the paper out.

6. Make sure that all the jammed paper is removed.

923
 If the paper is torn, a piece of paper may remain inside the machine. Check the following and remove the
piece of paper if it remains.

• Does the piece of paper remain under the FINE cartridge holder?

• Does the little piece of paper remain inside the machine?

• Does the piece of paper remain in the right side or the left side space (B) inside the machine?

7. Close the paper output cover, then reload the paper.

All print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.

Note
• When reloading the paper, make sure that you are using suitable paper for printing and are
loading it correctly. If the message about paper jam is displayed on the LCD of the machine or on
the computer screen when you resume printing after removing all the jammed paper, a piece of
paper may remain inside the machine. In this case, confirm that no piece of paper remains inside
the machine.

If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.

924
In Other Cases
Make sure of the following:

Check1 Are there any foreign objects around the paper output slot?

Check2 Is the paper curled?

Load the paper after correcting its curl.

925
1003

Cause
The machine is out of paper, or paper does not feed.

Action
Close the paper output tray, pull the cassette out, then load the paper.

When you load the paper, insert the paper stack until the leading edge touches the far end of the
cassette.

After loading the paper, push the cassette so that the mark on the cassette aligns with the front panel
as illustrated below.

When the cassette is inserted properly, you hear an electric sound once.

Open the paper output tray, then press the machine's OK button.

Note
• If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.

926
1200

Cause
The paper output cover is open.

Action
Close the paper output cover and wait for a while.

Do not close it while you are replacing a FINE cartridge.

927
1203

Cause
The paper output cover is opened while printing is in progress.

Action
If paper is left inside the machine, remove the paper slowly with both hands and close the paper output
cover.

Press the machine's OK button to dismiss the error.

The machine ejects one blank sheet of paper and resumes printing from the next paper.

The machine will not reprint the page that was printed when the paper output cover is opened. Try printing
again.

Important
• Do not open or close the paper output cover while printing is in progress, as this can damage the
machine.

928
1250

Cause
The paper output tray is closed.

Action
Open the paper output tray to resume printing.

929
1401

Cause
The FINE cartridge is not installed.

Action
Install the FINE cartridge.

If the error is not resolved, the FINE cartridge may be damaged. Contact the service center.

930
1403

Cause
The FINE cartridge cannot be recognized.

Action
Replace the FINE cartridge.

If the error is not resolved, the FINE cartridge may be damaged. Contact the service center.

931
1485

Cause
Appropriate ink cartridge is not installed.

Action
Printing cannot be executed because the ink cartridge is not compatible with this machine.

Install the appropriate ink cartridge.

If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.

932
1682

Cause
The FINE cartridge cannot be recognized.

Action
Replace the FINE cartridge.

If the error is not resolved, the FINE cartridge may be damaged. Contact the service center.

933
1684

Cause
The ink cartridge cannot be recognized.

Action
Printing cannot be executed because the ink cartridge may not be installed properly or may not be
compatible with this machine.

Install the appropriate ink cartridge.

If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.

934
1686

Cause
The ink may have run out.

Action
The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled since the ink level cannot be correctly
detected.

If you want to continue printing without this function, press the machine's Stop button for at least 5
seconds.

Canon recommends to use new genuine Canon cartridges in order to obtain optimum qualities.

Please be advised that Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble caused by continuation of
printing under the ink out condition.

Note
• If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, is displayed on the LCD.

• Since the information contained in the fax may be lost if it is printed in this condition, the received fax
will not be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory until the ink cartridge is replaced. You
must manually print out faxes that were stored in the memory. You can change the setting so that the
received fax is forcibly printed out instead of being stored in the memory, but all or part of the fax
information may not be printed because of the ink out condition.

935
1688

Cause
The ink has run out.

Action
Replace the ink cartridge and close the paper output cover.

If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing, press the machine's Stop button for at least 5
seconds with the ink cartridge installed. Then printing can continue under the ink out condition.

The function for detecting the remaining ink level will be disabled.

Replace the empty ink cartridge immediately after the printing. The resulting print quality is not
satisfactory, if printing is continued under the ink out condition.

Note
• If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, is displayed on the LCD.

• Since the information contained in the fax may be lost if it is printed in this condition, the received fax
will not be printed and will be stored in the machine's memory until the ink cartridge is replaced. You
must manually print out faxes that were stored in the memory. You can change the setting so that the
received fax is forcibly printed out instead of being stored in the memory, but all or part of the fax
information may not be printed because of the ink out condition.

936
168A

Cause
The FINE cartridge is not installed properly, or the FINE cartridge not compatible with this machine is
installed.

Action
Open the paper output cover, then remove the FINE cartridges.

Make sure that the FINE cartridge compatible with the machine is installed.

Then install the FINE cartridges again. Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.

When the FINE cartridge is installed properly, you hear an electric sound once.

After installing, close the paper output cover.

937
1702

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

938
1703

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

939
1704

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

940
1705

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

941
1712

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

942
1713

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

943
1714

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

944
1715

Cause
The ink absorber is almost full.

Action
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact the service center.

945
1871

Cause
The cassette is not inserted.

Action
After loading the paper, push the cassette so that the mark on the cassette aligns with the front panel
as illustrated below.

When the cassette is inserted properly, you hear an electric sound once.

Open the paper output tray, then press the machine's OK button.

Note
• The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after inserting the cassette. Register
the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the cassette.
• If you want to cancel printing, press the machine's Stop button.

946
1890

Cause
The protective material for the FINE cartridge holder or the tape may remain attached to the holder.

Action
Open the paper output cover, then confirm that the protective material or the tape does not remain
attached to the FINE cartridge holder.

If you find the protective material or the tape remains attached, remove it, then close the paper output
cover.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

947
2110

Cause
The paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to
the machine.

Note
• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the
LCD:
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Windows)

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Mac)

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Windows)
Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Mac)

• For copying, specify the paper settings for copying so that they match the cassette paper information.

• For details on the cassette paper information registering to the machine:

Paper setting for Printing (Windows)

Paper setting for Printing (Mac)

Paper setting for Printing (Smartphone and so on)

If the paper settings for printing or copying are different from the cassette paper information registered to
the machine as the following, a message is displayed on the LCD.

• Print settings specified on the printer driver:

Paper size: B5

Media type: Plain paper

• Cassette paper information registered to the machine:

Paper size: A4

Media type: Plain paper

Action
Pressing the machine's OK button, the following screen is displayed on the LCD.

Select what to do as necessary.

Note
• Depending on the setting, the choices below may not be displayed.

Use cass. settings

Select if you want to print on the paper loaded in the cassette without changing the paper settings.

948
 For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information
registered to the machine is A4, the machine starts printing or copying with B5 on the paper loaded in
the cassette.

Replace the paper

Select if you want to print after replacing the paper of the cassette.

For example, when the paper setting for printing or copying is B5 and the cassette paper information
registered to the machine is A4, you load B5 sized paper in the cassette before you start printing or
copying.

The cassette paper information registration screen is displayed after replacing the paper and inserting
the cassette. Register the cassette paper information according to the paper you loaded in the
cassette.

Note
• If you do not know what paper information to register to the machine, press the Back button when the
screen to select the operation is displayed. When the previous screen is displayed, confirm the paper
size and the media type, then register them to the machine.

• For details on the proper combination of paper settings you can specify by the printer driver or on the
LCD:

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Windows)

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Media Type) (Mac)

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Windows)

Paper Settings on the Printer Driver and the Printer (Paper Size) (Mac)

Cancel
Cancels printing.

Select when you change the paper settings specified for printing or copying. Change the paper
settings, then try printing again.

Important
• About the default setting for displaying the message which prevents misprinting:

The default setting is different between when you print or copy from the operation panel of the
machine and when you print using the printer driver.

• When you print or copy from the operation panel of the machine, the message which prevents
misprinting is enabled by default.

To change the setting for printing or copying using the operation panel of the machine:

Cassette settings (Windows)

Cassette settings (Mac)

Cassette settings (Smartphone and so on)

• When you print using the printer driver, the message which prevents misprinting is disabled by
default.

To change the setting for printing using the printer driver:

Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Windows)

Changing the Printer Operation Mode (Mac)

• When the message which prevents misprinting is disabled:

949
The machine starts printing or copying even though the paper settings for printing or copying and the
cassette paper information registered to the machine are different.

950
2120

Cause
The paper settings of the cassette is not complete.

Action
If the following screen is displayed, the paper settings of the cassette is not complete.

Press the machine's OK button to terminate the paper settings of the cassette.

951
2700

Cause
Possible causes include the following.

• Some errors occurred while copying and a certain time passed.

• Document is remained in the ADF.

• Some errors occurred while scanning and the document is remained in the ADF.

Action
Take the corresponding actions below.
• When you copy, press the OK button to dismiss the error, and try to copy again.
• When the document is remained in the ADF, press the OK button to feed out the document.

• When you scan, press the Stop button to cancel the scanning, and try to scan again.

952
2802

Cause
No document in the ADF.

Action
Press the OK button to resolve the error, then operate again after loading documents.

953
2803

Cause
The document is too long or is jammed in the ADF.

Action
Press the OK button to dismiss the error. Then make sure that the document you are loading meets the
machine's requirements before redoing the operation.

If the document is jammed, remove the jammed document following the procedure below.

Important
• Do not open the document cover if the document is jammed. The jammed document may be torn.
• The power cannot be turned off while the machine is sending or receiving a fax, or when the received
fax or the unsent fax are stored in the machine's memory.

Turn the machine off after making sure that it has completed sending or receiving all the faxes. Do
not unplug the power cord when turning the machine off.

If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

• If the original is jammed in the ADF:

Remove the document following the procedure below.

1. If printing is in progress, press the Stop button.

2. Turn off the machine.

3. Open the document feeder cover slowly.

If a multi-page document is loaded, open the document feeder cover after removing any pages
other than the jammed page from the ADF.

4. Pull out the jammed document from the ADF.

954
 5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.

If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.

Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.

In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.

If the document still jams, use the platen glass instead.

• If the original is jammed in the ADF (from the paper feed side):

Remove the document following the procedure below.

1. If printing is in progress, press the Stop button.

2. Turn off the machine.

3. Close the document tray, then open the document feeder cover slowly.

4. Pull out the jammed document from the ADF.

955
 5. Close the document feeder cover, then turn on the machine.
When rescanning the document after clearing the error, rescan it from the first page.
If you cannot remove the document or the document tears inside the machine, or if the document jam
error continues after removing the document, contact the service center.

Note
• The document may not feed properly depending on the media type, or your environment, such as
when the temperature and humidity are either too high or too low.

In this case, reduce the number of document pages to approximately half of the loading capacity.

If the document still jams, use the platen glass instead.

956
2900

Cause
Scanning the print head alignment sheet has failed.

Action
Press the OK button to dismiss the error, then take the actions described below.

• Make sure that the print head alignment sheet is set in the correct position and orientation on the
platen glass.

• Make sure the platen glass and the print head alignment sheet are not dirty.

• Make sure the type and size of loaded paper is suitable for Automatic Print Head Alignment.

For Automatic Print Head Alignment, always load one sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper.

• Make sure if print head nozzles are clogged.

Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the print head.

If the error is not resolved, perform Manual Print Head Alignment.

957
2901

Cause
Printing of the print head alignment pattern is complete and the machine is in waiting for scanning the
sheet.

Action
Proceed to scan the printed alignment pattern.

1. Load the print head alignment sheet on the platen glass.

Load the print head alignment sheet with the printed side facing down and align the mark on the
upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark .

2. Close the document cover gently, then press the machine's OK button.
The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and the print head position will be
adjusted automatically.

958
4100

Cause
The specified data cannot be printed.

Action
When you print the contents on CREATIVE PARK PREMIUM, confirm the message on the computer
screen, make sure that genuine Canon FINE cartridges are all installed properly, then start printing again.

959
4103

Cause
Cannot perform printing with the current print settings.

Action
Press the machine's Stop button to cancel printing.

Then change the print settings and print again.

960
5011

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

961
5012

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

962
5040

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

963
5100

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Cancel printing and turn off the machine. Then clear the jammed paper or protective material that is
preventing the FINE cartridge holder from moving, and turn on the machine again.

Cancel printing and turn off the machine.

Then confirm the following.

• Confirm that there are no materials (e.g. the protective material or jammed paper) that is preventing
the FINE cartridge holder from moving.

If any, remove the materials.

• Confirm that the FINE cartridges are installed properly.

Push up the FINE cartridge until it clicks into place.

After confirming the conditions above, turn on the machine again.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• When you clear the jammed paper or protective material that is preventing the FINE cartridge holder
from moving, be careful not to touch the clear film (A).

• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

964
5200

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

965
5400

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

966
5B02

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

967
5B03

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

968
5B04

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

969
5B05

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

970
5B12

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

971
5B13

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

972
5B14

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

973
5B15

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Contact the service center.

974
6000

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

975
6500

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

976
6800

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

977
6801

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

978
6900

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

979
6901

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

980
6902

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

981
6910

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

982
6911

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

983
6930

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

984
6931

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

985
6932

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

986
6933

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

987
6936

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

988
6937

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

989
6938

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

990
6939

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

991
693A

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

992
6940

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

993
6941

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

994
6942

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

995
6943

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

996
6944

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

997
6945

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

998
6946

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

999
9500

Cause
Printer error has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.

If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

1000
B201

Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

1001
B202

Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

1002
B203

Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

1003
B204

Cause
An error requiring you to contact the service center has occurred.

Action
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.

Contact the service center.

Important
• If you unplug the power cord, all the faxes stored in the machine's memory are deleted.

1004